Rohde and Schwarz SLV8000 SLV8000 Low Power Transmitter User Manual 32 SLX8000 12 12 07 01 00
Rohde & Schwarz Inc SLV8000 Low Power Transmitter 32 SLX8000 12 12 07 01 00
Users Manual including schematics and parts list
| Download: |  |
| Mirror Download [FCC.gov] | |
| Document ID | 1356439 |
| Application ID | BwMWd/ci6VsBqJ1A3SQD/w== |
| Document Description | Users Manual including schematics and parts list |
| Short Term Confidential | No |
| Permanent Confidential | No |
| Supercede | No |
| Document Type | User Manual |
| Display Format | Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf |
| Filesize | 476.71kB (5958833 bits) |
| Date Submitted | 2010-10-08 00:00:00 |
| Date Available | 2011-01-06 00:00:00 |
| Creation Date | 2007-12-17 09:10:06 |
| Producing Software | Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows) |
| Document Lastmod | 2010-08-23 10:27:03 |
| Document Title | 32 SLX8000-12.12.07-01.00.book |
| Document Creator | FrameMaker 7.2 |
| Document Author: | HUPFAUER |
Broadcasting Division
Instrument Manual
R&S®SLx8000
ADTV Transmitter Family
Band III / IV / V, Low Power
Only skilled personnel may perform the operations of the described instrument that
are necessary for installing and putting it into operation as well as maintaining, troubleshooting and servicing it.
Printed in Germany
2100.4400.32 -03
- 0.1 -
Instrument Manual
Transmitter Series SLx8000
Edition:
April 2009
Version:
E 03.00
© 2009 Rohde&Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
81671 Munich, Germany
This document may be duplicated or otherwise used or its contents made known to third parties only with
permission of the originator or other authorized persons.
Infringements constitute an offence and are subject to claim for damages (UrhG, UWG, BGB).
All rights reserved for patenting or utility model registration.
The R&S logo, Rohde & Schwarz and R&S are registered trademarks
of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG and their subsidiaries.
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co.KG
D-81671 München - Mühldorfstraße 15
Telefon: (089) 4129-0 ^ Int. +49894129-0
Telefax: (089) 4129-12164
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Printed in Federal Republic of Germany ^ Subject to change ^ Data without tolerances: typical values
2100.4400.32 -03
- 0.2 -
Qualitätszertifikat
Certificate of quality
Certificat de qualité
Der Umwelt verpflichtet
JJ Energie-effiziente,
RoHS-konforme Produkte
JJ Kontinuierliche Weiterentwicklung
nachhaltiger Umweltkonzepte
JJ ISO 14001-zertifiziertes
Umweltmanagementsystem
Dear Customer,
You have decided to buy a
Rohde & Schwarz product. You are
thus assured of receiving a product
that is manufactured using the most
modern methods available. This
product was developed, manufactured
and tested in compliance with our
quality management system standards. The Rohde & Schwarz quality
management system is certified
according to standards such as
ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.
ISO 9001
Certified Environmental System
ISO 14001
Cher client,
Vous avez choisi d’acheter un produit Rohde & Schwarz. Vous disposez
donc d’un produit fabriqué d’après les
méthodes les plus avancées. Le développement, la fabrication et les tests
respectent nos normes de gestion
qualité. Le système de gestion qualité
de Rohde & Schwarz a été homologué,
entre autres, conformément aux normes ISO 9001 et ISO 14001.
Engagement écologique
à efficience énergétique
JJ Amélioration continue de la durabilité
environnementale
JJ Système de gestion de l’environnement certifié selon ISO 14001
JJ Produits
Environmental commitment
JJ Energy-efficient products
JJ Continuous improvement in
environmental sustainability
JJ ISO 14001-certified environmental
management system
1171.0200.11 V 04.01
Sehr geehrter Kunde,
Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines
Rohde & Schwarz-Produktes entschieden. Hiermit erhalten Sie ein
nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden
hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach
den Regeln unseres Qualitätsmanagementsystems entwickelt, gefertigt
und geprüft. Das Rohde & SchwarzQualitätsmanagementsystem ist u.a.
nach ISO 9001 und ISO 14001
zertifiziert.
Certified Quality System
Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support
Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a
solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz
equipment.
Up-to-date information and upgrades
To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your
instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish.
We will take care that you will get the right information.
USA & Canada
Monday to Friday (except US public holidays)
8:00 AM – 8:00 PM Eastern Standard Time (EST)
Tel. from USA
888-test-rsa (888-837-8772) (opt 2)
From outside USA +1 410 910 7800 (opt 2)
Fax
+1 410 910 7801
E-mail
East Asia
Rest of the World
1171.0200.22-04.00
CustomerSupport@rohde-schwarz.com
Monday to Friday (except Singaporean public holidays)
8:30 AM – 6:00 PM Singapore Time (SGT)
Tel.
Fax
+65 6 513 0488
+65 6 846 1090
E-mail
CustomerSupport@rohde-schwarz.com
Monday to Friday
08:00 – 17:00
(except German public holidays)
Central European Time (CET)
Tel.
Fax
+49 89 4129 13774
+49 (0) 89 41 29 637 78
E-mail
CustomerSupport@rohde-schwarz.com
12
Address List
Headquarters, Plants and Subsidiaries
Locations Worldwide
Headquarters
Please refer to our homepage: www.rohde-schwarz.com
◆ Sales Locations
◆ Service Locations
◆ National Websites
ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München
P.O.Box 80 14 69 · D-81614 München
Phone +49 (89) 41 29-0
Fax +49 (89) 41 29-121 64
info.rs@rohde-schwarz.com
Plants
ROHDE&SCHWARZ Messgerätebau GmbH
Riedbachstraße 58 · D-87700 Memmingen
P.O.Box 16 52 · D-87686 Memmingen
Phone +49 (83 31) 1 08-0
+49 (83 31) 1 08-1124
info.rsmb@rohde-schwarz.com
ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Werk Teisnach
Kaikenrieder Straße 27 · D-94244 Teisnach
P.O.Box 11 49 · D-94240 Teisnach
Phone +49 (99 23) 8 50-0
Fax +49 (99 23) 8 50-174
info.rsdts@rohde-schwarz.com
ROHDE&SCHWARZ závod
Vimperk, s.r.o.
Location Spidrova 49
CZ-38501 Vimperk
ROHDE&SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Dienstleistungszentrum Köln
Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18 · D-51147 Köln
P.O.Box 98 02 60 · D-51130 Köln
Phone +420 (388) 45 21 09
Fax +420 (388) 45 21 13
Phone +49 (22 03) 49-0
Fax +49 (22 03) 49 51-229
info.rsdc@rohde-schwarz.com
service.rsdc@rohde-schwarz.com
Subsidiaries
R&S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH
Fritz-Hahne-Str. 7 · D-31848 Bad Münder
P.O.Box 20 02 · D-31844 Bad Münder
Phone +49 (50 42) 9 98-0
Fax +49 (50 42) 9 98-105
info.bick@rohde-schwarz.com
ROHDE&SCHWARZ FTK GmbH
Wendenschloßstraße 168, Haus 28
D-12557 Berlin
Phone +49 (30) 658 91-122
Fax +49 (30) 655 50-221
info.ftk@rohde-schwarz.com
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SIT GmbH
Am Studio 3
D-12489 Berlin
Phone +49 (30) 658 84-0
Fax +49 (30) 658 84-183
info.sit@rohde-schwarz.com
R&S Systems GmbH
Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18
D-51147 Köln
GEDIS GmbH
Sophienblatt 100
D-24114 Kiel
HAMEG Instruments GmbH
Industriestraße 6
D-63533 Mainhausen
1171.0200.42-02.00
Phone +49 (22 03) 49-5 23 25
Fax +49 (22 03) 49-5 23 36
info.rssys@rohde-schwarz.com
Phone +49 (431) 600 51-0
Fax +49 (431) 600 51-11
sales@gedis-online.de
Phone +49 (61 82) 800-0
Fax +49 (61 82) 800-100
info@hameg.de
12
Für Betrieb im Europäischen Wirtschaftsraum (EWR)
und zivilem Einsatz.
Hinweis gemäß dem Gesetz über "Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen" (FTEG) und der Europäischen Richtlinie 1999/5/EG:
Dieses Produkt darf innerhalb des EWR nicht uneingeschränkt betrieben werden, da
der verwendete Frequenzbereich auf nicht harmonisierten Bändern erfolgt. Nationale
Vorschriften / Genehmigungen sind zu beachten.
Das Gerät ist 4 Wochen vor Inverkehrbringen bei der jeweils zuständigen nationalen
Behörde für die Frequenzhoheit zu notifizieren. Informationen hierzu im Internet unter
folgender Adresse: http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/rtte/spectr.htm
For operation in the European Economic Area (EEA)
and civil use.
Note pursuant to the German Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FTEG) and the European R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:
Operation of this product within the EEA is subject to restrictions since the frequency
bands used are not harmonised. National provisions / authorizations shall be complied with.
The product shall be notified to the competent national frequency management
authority four weeks before the product is put on the market.
For more information refer to: http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/rtte/spectr.htm
Printed in Germany
2101.6093.54
- EU -
D/E-1
KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG)
und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Anhang V, zertifiziert durch die Benannte Stelle CETECOM ICT Services GmbH,
Reg. Nr. Q812137N
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive
1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Annex V, certified by the Notified Body CETECOM ICT Services GmbH Germany, Reg. No. Q812137N
Zertifikat-Nr.: / Certificate No.: 2007-53, Seite 1 von 2 / Page 1 of 2
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, dass die Funkanlage
This is to certify that the radio equipment
Equipment Type
Stock No.
Materialnummer
Benennung
SLX8000
2100.1000.20
Kleinleistungssender 2HE, Grundgerät digital
SLX8000
2100.1000.30
Kleinleistungssender 3HE, Grundgerät digital
Gerätetyp
Geräteklasse: / Equipment class:
Designation
Low Power Transmitter 2U, Basic Unit digital
Low Power Transmitter 3U, Basic Unit digital
2.10 (Broadcast transmitters)
bei bestimmungsgemäßer Verwendung den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.
complies with the essential requirements of §3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the R&TTE
Directive), when used for its intended purpose.
•
Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1 (Artikel 3 (1) a))
•
Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf die elektromagn. Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
•
Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Funkfrequenzspektrums
•
Luftschnittstelle bei Funkanlagen gemäß § 3(2) (Artikel 3(2))
•
•
•
•
Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1 (Article 3(1) a))
Protection requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility § 3(1)(2), (Article 3(1)(b))
Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum
Air interface of the radio systems pursuant to § 3(2) (Article 3(2))
Angewendete harmonisierte Normen: / Harmonized standards applied:
EN 60950-1 : 2001
ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.5.1 (2004-11)
ETSI EN 301 489-14 V1.2.1 (2003-05)
ETSI EN 302 296 V1.1.1 (2005-01)
Einhaltung der grundlegenden Anforderungen auf andere Art und
Weise (hierzu verwendete Standards/Spezifikationen):
ETSI EN 300 744 V1.5.1 (2004-11)
RegTP SSB RU 005
Rec. 1999/519/EG; 26. BImSchV
Other means of proving conformity with the essential requirements
(standards/specifications used):
Anbringung des CE-Zeichens ab: 2007 / Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2007
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
München, den 22. August 2008
Zentrales Qualitätsmanagement MF-QZ / Radde
Munich, 2008-08-22
2100.1000.20/.30-s1-
Central Quality Management
CE
D/E-5
KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG)
und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Anhang V, zertifiziert durch die Benannte Stelle CETECOM ICT Services GmbH,
Reg. Nr. Q812137N
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive
1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Annex V, certified by the Notified Body CETECOM ICT Services GmbH Germany, Reg. No. Q812137N
Zertifikat-Nr.: / Certificate No.: 2007-53, Seite 2 von 2 / Page 2 of 2
Equipment Type
Stock No.
Materialnummer
Benennung
SLX8000B9
SLX8000B10
SLX8000B11
SLX8000B12
2100.4000.02
2100.4022.02
2100.4045.02
2100.4068.02
AC Netzteil 2HE / AC Power Supply 2U
DC Netzteil 2HE / DC Power Supply 2U
AC Netzteil 3HE / AC Power Supply 3U
DC Netzteil 3HE / DC Power Supply 3U
SLX8000B13
2100.3232.02
GPS-Empfängerkarte / GPS Receiver Board
SLX8000B14
2100.3355.10
Einbausatz für DVB-T/-H Sender-/Empfänger-Betrieb
SLX8000B15
2100.3355.20
Einbausatz für DVB-T/-H Monitoring-Option
SLX8000B35
SLX8000B36
2100.1252.02
2100.1269.02
VHF-Verstärker 25 W / VHF Power Amplifier 25 W
VHF-Verstärker 50 W / VHF Power Amplifier 50 W
SLX8000B42
SLX8000B43
SLX8000B44
SLX8000B45
SLX8000B46
SLX8000B47
2100.1169.02
2100.1175.02
2100.1181.02
2100.1198.02
2100.1200.02
2100.1217.02
UHF-Verstärker 2 W / UHF Power Amplifier 2 W
UHF-Verstärker 5 W / UHF Power Amplifier 5 W
UHF-Verstärker 10 W / UHF Power Amplifier 10 W
UHF-Verstärker 25 W / UHF Power Amplifier 25 W
UHF-Verstärker 50 W / UHF Power Amplifier 50 W
UHF-Verstärker 100 W / UHF Power Amplifier 100 W
Gerätetyp
Designation
Kit for DVB-T/-H Re-Transmitter Operation
Kit for DVB-T/-H Monitoring Option
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
München, den 22. August 2008
Zentrales Qualitätsmanagement MF-QZ / Radde
Munich, 2008-08-22
2100.1000.20/.30-s2-
Central Quality Management
CE
D/E-5
KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG)
und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Anhang V, zertifiziert durch die Benannte Stelle CETECOM ICT Services GmbH,
Reg. Nr. Q812137N
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive
1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Annex V, certified by the Notified Body CETECOM ICT Services GmbH Germany, Reg. No. Q812137N
Zertifikat-Nr.: / Certificate No.: 2008-15, Seite 1 von 2 / Page 1 of 2
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, dass die Funkanlage
This is to certify that the radio equipment
Equipment Type
Stock No.
Materialnummer
Benennung
SLX8000A
2100.1000.21
Kleinleistungssender 2HE, Grundgerät analog/digital
SLX8000A
2100.1000.31
Kleinleistungssender 3HE, Grundgerät analog/digital
Gerätetyp
Geräteklasse: / Equipment class:
Designation
Low Power Transmitter 2U, Basic Unit analogue/digital
Low Power Transmitter 3U, Basic Unit analogue/digital
2.10 (Broadcast transmitters)
bei bestimmungsgemäßer Verwendung den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.
complies with the essential requirements of §3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the R&TTE
Directive), when used for its intended purpose.
•
Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1 (Artikel 3 (1) a))
•
Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf die elektromagn. Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
•
Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Funkfrequenzspektrums
•
Luftschnittstelle bei Funkanlagen gemäß § 3(2) (Artikel 3(2))
•
•
•
•
Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1 (Article 3(1) a))
Protection requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility § 3(1)(2), (Article 3(1)(b))
Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum
Air interface of the radio systems pursuant to § 3(2) (Article 3(2))
Angewendete harmonisierte Normen: / Harmonized standards applied:
EN 60950-1 : 2001
ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.5.1 (2004-11)
ETSI EN 301 489-14 V1.2.1 (2003-05)
ETSI EN 202 296 V1.1.1 (2005-01)
ETSI EN 302 297 V1.1.1 (2005-01)
Einhaltung der grundlegenden Anforderungen auf andere Art und
Weise (hierzu verwendete Standards/Spezifikationen):
ETSI EN 300 744 V1.5.1 (2004-11)
RegTP SSB RU 003
RegTP SSB RU 005
Rec. 1999/519/EG; 26. BImSchV
Other means of proving conformity with the essential requirements
(standards/specifications used):
Anbringung des CE-Zeichens ab: 2008 / Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2008
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
München, den 22. August 2008
Zentrales Qualitätsmanagement MF-QZ / Radde
Munich, 2008-08-22
2100.1000.21/.31-s1-
Central Quality Management
CE
D/E-4
KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG)
und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Anhang V, zertifiziert durch die Benannte Stelle CETECOM ICT Services GmbH,
Reg. Nr. Q812137N
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive
1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Annex V, certified by the Notified Body CETECOM ICT Services GmbH Germany, Reg. No. Q812137N
Zertifikat-Nr.:/ Certificate No.: 2008-15, Seite 2 von 2 /
Page 2 of 2
Equipment Type
Stock No.
Materialnummer
Benennung
SLX8000B9
SLX8000B10
SLX8000B11
SLX8000B12
2100.4000.02
2100.4022.02
2100.4045.02
2100.4068.02
AC Netzteil 2HE / AC Power Supply 2U
DC Netzteil 2HE / DC Power Supply 2U
AC Netzteil 3HE / AC Power Supply 3U
DC Netzteil 3HE / DC Power Supply 3U
SLX8000B13
2100.3232.02
GPS-Empfängerkarte / GPS Receiver Board
SLX8000B14
2100.3355.10
Einbausatz für DVB-T/-H Sender-/Empfänger-Betrieb
SLX8000B15
2100.3355.20
Einbausatz für DVB-T/-H Monitoring-Option
SLX8000B35
SLX8000B36
2100.1252.02
2100.1269.02
VHF-Verstärker 25 W / VHF Power Amplifier 25 W
VHF-Verstärker 50 W / VHF Power Amplifier 50 W
SLX8000B43
SLX8000B44
SLX8000B45
SLX8000B46
SLX8000B47
2100.1175.02
2100.1181.02
2100.1198.02
2100.1200.02
2100.1217.02
UHF-Verstärker 5 W / UHF Power Amplifier 5 W
UHF-Verstärker 10 W / UHF Power Amplifier 10 W
UHF-Verstärker 25 W / UHF Power Amplifier 25 W
UHF-Verstärker 50 W / UHF Power Amplifier 50 W
UHF-Verstärker 100 W / UHF Power Amplifier 100 W
Gerätetyp
Designation
Kit for DVB-T/-H Re-Transmitter Operation
Kit for DVB-T/-H Monitoring Option
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
München, den 22. August 2008
Zentrales Qualitätsmanagement MF-QZ / Radde
Munich, 2008-08-22
2100.1000.21/.31-s2-
Central Quality Management
CE
D/E-4
KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG)
und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Anhang V, zertifiziert durch die Benannte Stelle CETECOM ICT Services GmbH,
Reg. Nr. Q812137N
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive
1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Annex V, certified by the Notified Body CETECOM ICT Services GmbH Germany, Reg. No. Q812137N
Zertifikat-Nr.: / Certificate No.: 2008-50
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, dass die Funkanlage
This is to certify that the radio equipment
Gerätetyp
Benennung
Materialnummer
Equipment Type
Stock No.
Designation
SLX8000B16
2100.3455.02
Parallel-Fernschnittstelle
Parallel Interface
Geräteklasse: / Equipment class: 1.4 (Wired data equipment)
bei bestimmungsgemäßer Verwendung den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.
complies with the essential requirements of §3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the R&TTE
Directive), when used for its intended purpose.
•
Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1 (Artikel 3 (1) a))
•
Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf die elektromagn. Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
•
•
Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1 (Article 3(1) a))
Protection requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility § 3(1)(2), (Article 3(1)(b))
Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:
EN 60950-1 : 2003
ETSI EN 301489-1 V1.6.1 (2005-09)
ETSI EN 301489-11 V1.3.1 (2006-02)
ETSI EN 301489-14 V1.2.1 (2003-05)
Einhaltung der grundlegenden Anforderungen auf andere Art
und Weise (hierzu verwendete Standards/Spezifikationen):
---
Harmonized standards applied:
Other means of proving conformity with the essential requirements
(standards/specifications used):
Anbringung des CE-Zeichens ab: 2008 / Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2008
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
München, den 25. Juli 2008
Zentrales Qualitätsmanagement MF-QZ / Radde
Munich, 2008-07-25
2100.3455.02
Central Quality Management
CE
D/E-1
SLX8000
2100.4400.32
CONTENTS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
DESIGN AND CHARACTERISTICS
INSTALLATION
COMMISSIONING
OPERATING
MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE
ANNEX
- 0.3 -
E-2
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 1.0 -
E-1
Sicherheitshinweise
Kundeninformation zur Batterieverordnung (BattV)
Dieses Gerät enthält eine schadstoffhaltige Batterie. Diese
darf nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden.
Nach Ende der Lebensdauer darf die Entsorgung nur über
eine Rohde&Schwarz-Kundendienststelle oder eine geeignete Sammelstelle erfolgen.
Safety Regulations for Batteries
(according to BattV)
This equipment houses a battery containing harmful substances that must not be disposed of as normal household
waste.
After its useful life, the battery may only be disposed of at a
Rohde & Schwarz service center or at a suitable depot.
Normas de Seguridad para Baterías
(Según BattV)
Este equipo lleva una batería que contiene sustancias perjudiciales, que no se debe desechar en los contenedores
de basura domésticos.
Después de la vida útil, la batería sólo se podrá eliminar en
un centro de servicio de Rohde & Schwarz o en un
depósito apropiado.
Consignes de sécurité pour batteries
(selon BattV)
Cet appareil est équipé d'une pile comprenant des substances nocives. Ne jamais la jeter dans une poubelle pour
ordures ménagéres.
Une pile usagée doit uniquement être éliminée par un centre de service client de Rohde & Schwarz ou peut être collectée pour être traitée spécialement comme déchets dangereux.
1171.0300.41
D/E/ESP/F-2
Chapter 1
Safety Instructions
CONTENTS
1 About this Manual ............................................................................ 1
2 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Instruments ... 2
3 General Safety Instructions ............................................................ 3
4 Special Danger Warnings ............................................................... 4
4.1 Hazards due to AC Supply Voltage ...............................................................4
4.1.1 AC Power Supply .........................................................................................4
4.1.2 Replacing Fuses ...........................................................................................4
4.2 Hazards due to High-Energy Circuits ...........................................................4
4.3 RF Hazards ......................................................................................................5
4.3.1 Mandatory Training ......................................................................................5
4.3.2 RF Shielding .................................................................................................5
4.3.3 Rules for Operating an Amplifier ..................................................................5
4.3.4 Rules for Working with an Open Amplifier ....................................................6
4.4 Hazards due to Beryllium Oxide (BeO) Ceramics .......................................6
4.4.1 Rules for Handling BeO Ceramics ...............................................................6
4.4.2 Marking Parts or Components Containing BeO Ceramics ...........................6
4.4.3 Measures in Case of Breakage and Waste Disposal ...................................7
2095.7346.32
- 1.01 -
E-3
Chapter 1
Safety Instructions
About this Manual
This manual is part of the documentation for the NX8000 family of transmitters from Rohde
& Schwarz. Each transmitter and each transmitter component is described in a separate
manual. The individual manuals of the family of transmitters are modular in structure and
complement each other.
Structure
Each transmitter component is described in a separate manual and can thus be used as an
individual component (where practical). The transmitter manual is the main document for
the entire set of documentation. It describes all steps that are necessary to install a transmitter, put it into operation, operate and maintain it. Where applicable, the transmitter manual refers to the individual manuals for the various components. The component manuals,
in turn, also refer to the transmitter manual whenever the component is to be used as a
transmitter module.
Contents
The manuals for the family of transmitters describe all steps required to install the transmitter or one of its components, put them into operation, operate and maintain them, troubleshoot and service them. The Annex includes interface descriptions plus technical
documents.
For convenience, all manuals are structured identically. Sections that are not relevant to the
manual at hand are also included but are left blank.
Safety
All skilled personnel working with a transmitter or its components must read all relevant
manuals and comply with the safety measures that are detailed in the chapter about safety
and in the applicable sections in the manual. The transmitter and the individual transmitter
components must be used only for their intended purpose. All operations involving the
transmitter or individual transmitter components must be performed by skilled personnel.
The manual will point out specifically if additional qualifications are required.
Symbols and Layout
The triangular warning symbol indicates danger. In addition to the triangular warning symbol, different key words indicate the level of potential danger.
Instructions are given in numbered steps or indicated by an "index finger" symbol to the left
of the instruction text. The results of the performed instructions are indented.
The key word "Note" precedes notes. Notes contain additional information and tips to help
facilitate the work at hand.
All other formatting options add structure to the text and are self-explanatory.
2095.7346.32
- 1.1 -
E-3
Chapter 1
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems
and Instruments
ATTENTION!
The safety instructions provided in this manual must be complied with!
Pay special attention to the following points:
Only skilled personnel may perform electrical installation and electrical connection
tasks.
Always follow the relevant national and international safety rules and regulations when
equipping operating areas and when setting up and operating electrical equipment.
These rules and regulations include for example:
– Protective measures to prevent accidents
– Protective measures to prevent overvoltage
– Insulation status of electrical equipment
– Grounding of electrical equipment
– Physical properties and laying of electric lines and cables
– Regulations applying to industrial premises and areas as well as to special facilities.
When setting up the rack, observe the country-specific rules for accident prevention, for
example with regard to:
– Risk of getting crushed when working with loads suspended in the air
– Risk of falling off ladders
– Risk of injury when lifting heavy objects.
Use your personal protective equipment for installation and repair work, i.e. wear pro-
tective clothing such as helmets, safety gloves and eye protection, depending on the
task at hand.
Operate the equipment and systems only when the cabinet is closed. If you have to open
the cabinet for maintenance and repair work, comply with the applicable safety instructions.
If the equipment and systems are removed from the AC power supply, all poles must be
disconnected. Check for and remove any external power supply, i.e. all measuring cables, extension cables, multiple socket outlets (except for special service sockets). Wait
for five minutes to ensure that any and all capacitors are sufficiently discharged.
Additionally with liquid-cooled transmitters:When filling and installing the cooling system
(pump unit and heat-exchanger unit), observe the rules for handling hazardous substances (cooling agents); see section "safety data sheets about hazardous substances"
under "EU safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/EC Antifrogen".
2095.7346.32
- 1.2 -
E-3
Chapter 1
Safety Instructions
General Safety Instructions
This section contains general safety instructions that apply to all products manufactured or
distributed by Rohde & Schwarz.
In accordance with IEC 215 and EN 60215, transmitters and their auxiliary equipment must
be operated only under the responsibility of skilled personnel. The EN 60215 standard
("Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment") defines the minimum requirements
for skilled electrical personnel.
Complying with all statutory provisions is a precondition for operating radiocommunications
systems and equipment. The operator or the operator's authorized representative is responsible for ensuring compliance with these guidelines. They must also ensure that the
operating personnel meets the applicable country-specific training requirements. These requirements also include any periodic training that is necessary.
2095.7346.32
- 1.3 -
E-3
Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the attached EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a
condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation,
you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions
regarding these safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer
them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that only
skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the
product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be indicated at
the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions and the product
documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories.
Symbols and safety labels
Notice, general
danger location
Observe product
documentation
ON/OFF supply
voltage
Caution
when
handling
heavy
equipment
Standby
indication
1171.0000.42-05.00
Danger of
electric
shock
Direct current
(DC)
Warning!
Hot surface
PE terminal
Alternating current
(AC)
Ground
Direct/alternating
current (DC/AC)
Ground
terminal
Be careful when
handling
electrostatic
sensitive
devices
Device fully protected by
double (reinforced) insulation
Page 1
Basic Safety Instructions
Tags and their meaning
The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
indicates the possibility of incorrect operation which can result in damage to
the product.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic
Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or
military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used
only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The use of tags in
connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury
or material damage.
Operating states and operating positions
The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, pollution
severity 2, overvoltage category 2, use only indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level,
max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominal
voltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
death.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 2
Basic Safety Instructions
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with an earthing contact and protective earth connection.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective earth connection either in the feed line or in the product itself is
not permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension
cords or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that
they are safe to use.
4. If the product does not have a power switch for disconnection from the AC supply network, the plug of
the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device. In such cases, always ensure that the
power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times (corresponding to the length of connecting
cable, approx. 2 m). Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from
the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems, a
disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cable on a regular basis to
ensure that it is in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully
laying the power cable, you can ensure that the cable will not be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.
6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fused with max. 16 A (higher fuse
only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fusing, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be taken to
avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 or IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1 standards that apply
in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the PE terminal on site and the
product's PE conductor must be made first before any other connection is made. The product may be
installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that anyone who has access to the product, as
well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 3
Basic Safety Instructions
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1. Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.
Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.
2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal", item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no
other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation. The objective is to
prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 4
Basic Safety Instructions
Repair and service
1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.
2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, PE conductor test, insulation
resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure the
continued safety of the product.
Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells
If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Keep cells and batteries out of the hands of children. If a cell or a battery has been swallowed, seek
medical aid immediately.
5. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
6. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
7. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
8. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.
Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 5
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.
Waste disposal
1. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
2. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
Es imprescindible leer y observar las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantía de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el certificado de conformidad
adjunto de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estándares técnicos de
seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario
deberá atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a
estas informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 6
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios.
Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad
Aviso: punto de
peligro general
Observar la
documentación
del producto
Tensión de
alimentación de
PUESTA EN
MARCHA /
PARADA
Atención en
el manejo de
dispositivos
de peso
elevado
Indicación de
estado de
espera
(Standby)
1171.0000.42-05.00
Peligro de
choque
eléctrico
Advertencia:
superficie
caliente
Corriente
continua (DC)
Conexión a
conductor de
protección
Corriente alterna
(AC)
Conexión
a tierra
Conexión
a masa
Corriente
continua /
Corriente alterna
(DC/AC)
Aviso: Cuidado
en el manejo de
dispositivos
sensibles a la
electrostática
(ESD)
El aparato está protegido
en su totalidad por un
aislamiento doble
(reforzado)
Page 7
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
Palabras de señal y su significado
En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
PELIGRO identifica un peligro inminente con riesgo elevado que
provocará muerte o lesiones graves si no se evita.
ADVERTENCIA identifica un posible peligro con riesgo medio de
provocar muerte o lesiones (graves) si no se evita.
ATENCIÓN identifica un peligro con riesgo reducido de provocar
lesiones leves o moderadas si no se evita.
AVISO indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y, como
consecuencia, dañarlo.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento
El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes.
1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, grado de suciedad 2, categoría de sobrecarga eléctrica 2, uso
solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta
4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de ±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de
±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, pueden
causarse lesiones o incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 8
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se deberá considerar
el enchufe del cable de conexión como interruptor. En estos casos se deberá asegurar que el enchufe
siempre sea de fácil acceso (de acuerdo con la longitud del cable de conexión, aproximadamente
2 m). Los interruptores de función o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si los
productos sin interruptor están integrados en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el
interruptor en el nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.
6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión Ueff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 9
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.
Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados, los llamados alérgenos
(p. ej. el níquel). Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen reacciones
alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o
dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las causas y
evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación", punto 1.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 10
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.
Baterías y acumuladores o celdas
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterías y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estándar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y baterías deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un paño seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o baterías no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterías en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recíproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterías de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Mantener baterías y celdas fuera del alcance de los niños. En caso de ingestión de una celda o
batería, avisar inmediatamente a un médico.
5. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a impactos mecánicos fuertes indebidos.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 11
Informaciones elementales de seguridad
6. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
médico.
7. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterías que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
baterías solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
8. Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica. Las baterías o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje.
Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.
2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.
Eliminación
1. Si se trabaja de manera mecánica y/o térmica cualquier producto o componente más allá del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o níquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formación adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminación de
residuos.
2. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminación de residuos. Tenga en cuenta también en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentación del producto. La
eliminación incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daños a la salud o
daños al medio ambiente.
1171.0000.42-05.00
Page 12
Chapter 1
Special Danger Warnings
4.1
Hazards due to AC Supply Voltage
Safety Instructions
There is a risk of electric shock with any Vrms > 30 V AC or V > 60 V DC voltage. Appropriate measures must be taken to prevent exposure to any danger when working with voltages
that bear the risk of electric shock. Never work on live parts unless specifically required and
only if the special safety precautions are complied with.
4.1.1
AC Power Supply
Before connecting the equipment to the AC power supply, make sure that the AC supply
data specified on the system or equipment matches the rated data of the local AC supply. The supply circuit must be protected by fuses against overloading and short circuits
at all times.
Miniature modules have neutral conductor fuses. As a result, the power supply may still
be connected even after interruption of the circuit by a fuse.
4.1.2
Replacing Fuses
Replace the safety fuses accessible in the operator area only if no voltage is being ap-
plied to the instruments. The safety fuses may be replaced only by fuses with identical
electric data, identical switching characteristics and identical switch-off capacity.
Motor and line circuit breakers accessible in the transmitter's operator area may be op-
erated. If their response range is selectable, do not change the settings made by the
manufacturer. If the settings are accidentally changed, reset them by using the correct
values specified in this documentation.
4.2
Hazards due to High-Energy Circuits
The instruments include low-voltage circuits which can be fed from an extremely low-impedance voltage source (e.g. amplifier operating voltage). These circuits conduct dangerously
large amounts of energy. We handle these circuits in the same manner as circuits with voltages that bear the risk of electric shock. They are usually covered and thus protected
against accidental contact. The cover comes with a warning label.
Practical experience has repeatedly shown that a short circuit caused by metal tools can
cause severe burns. For safety reasons, high-energy circuits are protected by covers and
are thus not accessible within the operator area of the instruments.
2095.7346.32
- 1.4 -
E-3
Chapter 1
Safety Instructions
If you need to measure low-impedance voltages, during repair work for example, exer-
cise the same caution as when measuring operating voltages that bear the risk of electric shock.
Wear protective clothing if necessary.
Before you open an instrument or remove its cover, switch off the operating voltage and
wait for five minutes to ensure that any and all capacitors are sufficiently discharged.
Do not short-circuit capacitors to discharge them.
4.3
RF Hazards
4.3.1
Mandatory Training
Operators must instruct their personnel on how to use this transmitter or instrument in
accordance with EN 60215 and IEC 215. This periodic training must cover the radio-frequency hazards of the individual transmitter or instrument. Only after such training has
been provided and documented may the operating personnel handle switching and operating tasks.
High-energy RF circuits within the transmitter or the instrument are routed via conventional
detachable RF connectors (e.g. N). Depending on the output power, the transmitter or instrument outputs come with screw-in or pluggable RF lines or ducts.
If RF lines or modules conduct high power, the connection point or the entire module is
marked with the standard warning symbol (yellow triangle with black exclamation mark).
4.3.2
RF Shielding
Transmitters and instruments from Rohde & Schwarz are shielded in such a manner that
RF radiation does not pose any danger even in the immediate vicinity if all RF lines are
closed. This statement is based on the ordinance for electromagnetic fields as defined in
German law:
The 26th ordinance for the Federal Emission Protection Law dated December 16, 1996 defines limit values for radio-frequency equipment for electric and magnetic field strengths.
4.3.3
Rules for Operating an Amplifier
Opening RF lines during operation may cause electric arcs. This can cause burns and eye
injuries.
Operate the amplifier only if an antenna or dummy antenna is connected.
Never undo RF lines during amplifier operation.
Never open amplifiers or modules during amplifier operation.
Never put amplifiers into operation if RF lines are open.
2095.7346.32
- 1.5 -
E-3
Chapter 1
4.3.4
Safety Instructions
Rules for Working with an Open Amplifier
Operating the instrument with RF power is not permitted if the instrument has been opened
or its covers removed.
4.4
Hazards due to Beryllium Oxide (BeO) Ceramics
Note
Instruments and modules with components containing beryllium oxide (BeO) ceramics are
marked accordingly. The following applies:
If handled correctly, parts or components containing BeO ceramics are not hazardous to
health.
If used improperly, however, BeO dust may be released. BeO dust causes chronic lung disease (berylliosis); inhaling large amounts over an extended period of time is toxic, causing
respiratory paralysis and death.
4.4.1
Rules for Handling BeO Ceramics
Parts or components containing BeO ceramics must not be opened, mechanically pro-
cessed or destroyed.
Above all, these parts or components must not be scratched, broken, ground, tempered
and sandblasted, not even under exhaust hoods.
4.4.2
Marking Parts or Components Containing BeO Ceramics
Rohde & Schwarz marks all parts or components containing BeO ceramics in the electric
parts list, the circuit diagram and the transmitter.
The electric parts list contains the following text:
Beryllium oxide
Hinweise beachten
Observe instructions
The circuit diagram includes the full warning:
Achtung!
Hinweise zur Sicherheit beim Umgang mit Teilen aus Berylliumoxid-Keramik beachten!
Attention!
Observe safety instructions for handling parts made from beryllium oxide ceramics!
In the transmitter, all components containing parts made from beryllium oxide ceramics are
marked with a warning symbol and a label:
2095.7346.32
- 1.6 -
E-3
Chapter 1
Safety Instructions
BERYLLIUMOXID / BERYLLIUM OXIDE
Sicherheitshinweise beachten
4.4.3
Observe safety instructions
Measures in Case of Breakage and Waste Disposal
If BeO dust has been caused by breakage or other mechanical or electrical destruction,
wipe away the dust using moist cloths and seal them in plastic bags together with the broken pieces. Wear protective gloves.
Mark the bags with the danger symbol and text:
Berylliumoxid-Staub
Beryllium oxide dust
Skull and crossbones
danger symbol
The bags must be disposed of separately in accordance with national waste disposal laws.
Desoldered components containing BeO ceramics must also be disposed of in this way. All
manufacturers of parts or components containing BeO ceramics that are known to Rohde
& Schwarz gladly take back defective parts free of charge.
2095.7346.32
- 1.7 -
E-3
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 2
DESIGN AND CHARACTERISTICS
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 2.0 -
E-1
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
CONTENTS
1 Device Purpose and Overview ....................................................... 1
2 Modules and Components .............................................................. 4
2.1 Connectors ......................................................................................................4
2.2 Elements on Front Panel ...............................................................................6
2.2.1 Display ..........................................................................................................6
2.2.2 Keys and Indicators ......................................................................................6
2.3 CompactFlash Card ........................................................................................8
2.4 Fan ...................................................................................................................8
2.5 Options ............................................................................................................8
2.5.1 Power Supply Units ......................................................................................8
2.5.2 GPS Receiver (SLX8000B13) ......................................................................9
2.5.3 DVB-T/-H Receiver (SLX8000B14) / DVB-T/-H Monitor (SLX8000B15) ......9
3 Specifications ................................................................................ 10
3.1 General Data .................................................................................................10
3.2 Specific Data: SLx8000 DTV ........................................................................11
3.2.1 Supported Modulation Parameters .............................................................11
3.2.2 Input Processing .........................................................................................12
3.2.3 Precorrection ..............................................................................................12
3.2.4 Quality Data ................................................................................................12
3.2.5 Nonharmonics and Harmonics ...................................................................13
3.3 Specific Data: SLx8000 Analog TV .............................................................14
3.3.1 Supported Video and Audio Standards ......................................................14
3.3.2 Video Functions ..........................................................................................14
3.3.3 Audio Functions ..........................................................................................14
3.3.4 Precorrection ..............................................................................................14
3.3.5 Quality Data ................................................................................................15
3.3.5.1 With Standard Factory Precorrection ............................................................... 15
3.3.5.2 With Manual Postcorrection ............................................................................. 15
3.3.5.3 Miscellaneous ................................................................................................... 15
3.3.6 Nonharmonics and Harmonics ...................................................................16
3.4 Specific Data: Options .................................................................................17
3.4.1 GPS Receiver (SLX8000B13) ....................................................................17
2100.4400.32
- 2.01 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
3.4.2 DVB-T/-H Receiver (SLX8000B14) / DVB-T/-H Monitor (SLX8000B15) ....17
2100.4400.32
- 2.02 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
Device Purpose and Overview
The R&S SLx8000 low-power transmitters are used to transmit digital or analog TV signals.
The signals are transmitted in the UHF or VHF frequency range in compliance with the modulation standards DVB(-T/-H) and ATSC (DTV) or B/G, M/N, I (ATV).
Note
The transmitter characteristics comply with the relevant standard specifications and EN
standards thus meeting international requirements.
The transmitters, which are integrated in a compact 19" housing, have been designed for
low-maintenance and uncomplicated operation. All parts inside the instruments are maintenance-free. Automatic functions such as loading previously stored precorrection curves
make operation extremely easy when the channel is changed. Precorrection by the user is
unnecessary.
Fig. 1 R&S SLV8010 – front view
Fig. 2 R&S SLV8050 – front view
Fig. 3 R&S SLV8010 – rear view
2100.4400.32
- 2.1 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
Fig. 4 R&S SLV8050 – rear view
DTV and ADTV hardware models
The transmitters are available as DTV and ADTV models. Whereas the DTV model supports only digital television, the ADTV model also has connectors which allow analog TV
signals to be transmitted. To be able to use ATV, however, the appropriate software option
must also be installed.
Power classes
The R&S SLx8000 transmitter family comprises instruments with the following power classes.
Transmitter
Amplifier
option
R&S SLV8002
SLX8000B42
R&S SLV8005
2100.4400.32
Nom. output power
DVB-T/-H
2W
ATSC
3W
DVB-T/-H
5W
ATSC
8W
Analog TV
12 W sync peak
DVB-T/-H
10 W
ATSC
16 W
Analog TV
25 W sync peak
Band
HU
UHF
IV / V
SLX8000B43
R&S SLV8005A
SLX8000B43
R&S SLV8010
SLX8000B44
R&S SLV8010A
TV standard
SLX8000B44
- 2.2 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Transmitter
Amplifier
option
R&S SLV8025
SLX8000B45
R&S SLV8025A
SLX8000B45
R&S SLV8050
SLX8000B46
R&S SLV8050A
SLX8000B46
R&S SLV8100
SLX8000B47
R&S SLV8100A
R&S SLW8025
TV standard
Nom. output power
DVB-T/-H
25 W
ATSC
40 W
Analog TV
62 W sync peak
DVB-T/-H
50 W
ATSC
80 W
Analog TV
125 W sync peak
DVB-T/-H
100 W
ATSC
150 W
Analog TV
250 W sync peak
DVB-T/-H
25 W
ATSC
40 W
Analog TV
62 W sync peak
DVB-T/-H
50 W
ATSC
80 W
Analog TV
125 W sync peak
DVB-T/-H
100 W
ATSC
150 W
Analog TV
250 W sync peak
Band
HU
UHF
IV / V
SLX8000B35
R&S SLW8025A
SLX8000B35
R&S SLW8050
SLX8000B36
R&S SLW8050A
SLX8000B36
R&S SLW8100
SLX8000B37
R&S SLW8100A
Note
SLX8000B47
Design and Characteristics
SLX8000B37
VHF
III
The specified nominal powers only apply to the POWER OUT connector (X7).
User interface
The instrument is operated locally by means of a keypad and display. Important operating
states are also signaled by LEDs in the front panel. The integrated Ethernet interfaces also
allow the transmitter to be operated using a PC and web browser both locally and remotely
by means of access over the Internet.
2100.4400.32
- 2.3 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
Modules and Components
The transmitter consists of the following modules and components:
ADTV coder with
– Control unit
– Display and keyboard interfaces
– Instrument interfaces
– Slot for CompactFlash memory card
RF board with amplifier control unit
Amplifier with 2, 5, 10, 25, 50 or 100 W DVB power output (depending on the variant)
Front panel: White-on-blue display, 200 x 48 pixels
Power supply unit
Fan
Only the modules or components relevant to the user are described below.
2.1
Connectors
The connectors are all on the rear panel of the instrument (with the exception of the RF
monitoring socket). The connectors listed here depend on the hardware variant (DTV or
ADTV) and hardware options that may be installed (e.g. GPS).
Connectors on rear panel (DTV and ADTV)
2100.4400.32
No.
Label
Type
Connection
X7
POWER OUT
N female
RF output
X21
TS 1
BNC, female, 75
Transport stream input 1 (main signal;
with hierarchy: HP stream)
X22
TS 2
BNC, female, 75
Transport stream signal 2 (standby signal; with hierarchy: LP stream)
X23
EXT 1 PPS
BNC, female, 50
Input for seconds pulse from external
reference
X24
EXT REF
BNC, female, 50
Reference input, 5 MHz or 10 MHz,
-5 dBm to 20 dBm or TTL
X29
REF OUT
BNC, female, 50
Monitoring output for internal
1 PPS or 10 MHz signal
X30
ETHERNET
LOCAL
RJ45, female
Connection of a PC for local operation;
preset address at X30:
– IP address: 192.168.57.253
– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
- 2.4 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
No.
Label
Type
Connection
X31
ETHERNET
REMOTE
RJ45, female
Network connection for remote access;
preset address at X31:
– IP address: 192.168.58.253
– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
X32
TX CONTROL
D-Sub, female (9-contact)
RF loop and CAN bus; connection for
parallel remote-control interface or N+1
system
Low-temperature connector or DC connection
AC voltage feed
X8
Connectors on rear panel (additional connectors for ADTV)
No.
Label
Type
Connection
X20
VF
BNC, female, 75
Analog video input
X25
BTSC
BNC, female, 75
Analog audio input to BTSC standard
(M, N)
X26
NICAM DATA
BNC, female, 50
Digital data input for NICAM 728
X27
AUDIO 1
XLR, female, 600
Analog audio input AF1
X28
AUDIO 2
XLR, female, 600
Analog audio input AF2
Connectors on rear panel (depending on hardware option)
No.
Label
Type
Connection
X1
RECEIVER
N female, 50
Antenna input for DVB-T receiver
option (retransmitter)
X2
GPS ANTENNA
N female, 50
Connection for optional GPS antenna
X3
RECEIVER AUX
N female, 50
Second antenna input for DVB-T monitor option
Connector on front panel
No.
2100.4400.32
Label
Type
Connection
RF MONITOR
SMA, female, 50
RF test output
- 2.5 -
E-3
Chapter 2
2.2
Elements on Front Panel
2.2.1
Display
Design and Characteristics
Local operation of the instrument allows all the main information calls for the most important
system parameters and their settings, complete with intuitive graphical menus. The instrument is operated locally via display menus using control keys and cursor keys.
Fig. 5 Display of R&S SLx8000
2.2.2
Keys and Indicators
A number of keys on the front panel are assigned two functions. The following applies:
– Press the key briefly = The function indicated on the key is executed
– Press the key longer = The function indicated above the key is executed
Fig. 6 Keys and LEDs of the R&S SLx8000
2100.4400.32
- 2.6 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
Menu keys
Key
Meaning / function
OK / MENU
OK:
– Confirms an entry or selection
MENU:
– In system overview: Starts the menu control function
– From a menu: Calls the context menu
BACK / HOME
BACK:
– In a setting window: Cancels the entered value, provided
that it has not yet been confirmed with OK
– In the general menu: Goes back one step to the last
selected menu
HOME:
– Returns from the menu tree to the system overview.
CURSOR KEYS
: Navigation in the menu tree
: Navigation to a digit in an entered value
: Increments or decrements a number
Function keys and displays
Key
Meaning / function
RF ON/OFF
Switches transmission mode ON or OFF. If transmission mode is free of
interference, the instrument produces RF power.
LOCAL
Switches between local and remote operation
With local operation, settings are entered either on the front panel of the
instrument or via a PC which is connected to X30 (ETHERNET
LOCAL).
With remote operation, settings are made via a logged-on network client
which is connected to the X31 interface (ETHERNET REMOTE).
2100.4400.32
LED
Meaning
RF ON/OFF
LED (green) signals transmitter operation. If the instrument is producing
power, the RF PRESENT LED also lights.
LOCAL
LED (yellow) signals local operation. The instrument can no longer be
operated remotely.
RF PRESENT
LED (green) signals that RF is present at the output. The LED goes out
if the output power drops below a fixed threshold.
WARNING
LED (yellow) signals a general warning from the instrument.
FAULT
LED (red) signals a cumulative fault on the instrument.
- 2.7 -
E-3
Chapter 2
2.3
Design and Characteristics
CompactFlash Card
The settings for the instrument operating parameters are written to a CompactFlash memory card. The parameters can be transferred quickly from one device to another (e.g. a replacement device) by simply swapping the memory card.
ATTENTION!
The CompactFlash card can only be inserted into another R&S SLx8000 and must never
be inserted into a card reader. The latter will render the card unusable for the R&S
SLx8000.
2.4
Fan
The instrument has a fan which draws in cool air via the ventilation openings in the front
panel and blows the warm air out via the rear panel.
The fan is mounted on the outside of the rear panel and can therefore be changed without
opening the cover on the instrument.
If a fan fails a warning message is generated. If the temperature then increases too much,
a fault message is output and the instrument is shut down in order to prevent the electronics
from overheating.
2.5
Options
2.5.1
Power Supply Units
Different power supply units are used depending on the power class and intended use of
the transmitter.
AC power supply units
Transmitter variant
2100.4400.32
HU
Power supply unit
Var. 20
SLX8000B9: 150 W
Var. 30/31
SLX8000B11: 1000 W
- 2.8 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
DC power supply units
Transmitter variant
2.5.2
HU
Power supply unit
Var. 20
SLX8000B10: 150 W
Var. 30/31
SLX8000B12: 1000 W
GPS Receiver (SLX8000B13)
The optional integrated GPS receiver provides the transmitter with a frequency and time
reference, e.g. for SFN operation.
2.5.3
DVB-T/-H Receiver (SLX8000B14) / DVB-T/-H Monitor
(SLX8000B15)
The DVB-T/H Receiver option (receiver module) enables the transmitter to be configured
as a retransmitter. Alternatively the receiver module can be used to monitor the transmitter
output signal (signal output coupling on the monitoring output from the transmitter output).
Up to two receiver modules may be integrated. The following possible applications are
available:
– Retransmitter and/or radiated signal monitoring
– Retransmitter with hierarchy (LP and HP are demodulated by one receiver module
each)
2100.4400.32
- 2.9 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Specifications
3.1
General Data
Design and Characteristics
TV standards
Variants 20, 30 and 31 .......................... DTV: DVB-T, ATSC
Variant 31 ............................................. Analog TV: B/G, D/K, M, M1 (M + FM dual
sound standard), N, I, I1
Frequency ranges ...................................... 170 MHz to 250 MHz (band III)
470 MHz to 860 MHz (band IV/V)
Step size for frequency adjustment ............ 1 Hz
Environmental conditions
Operating temperature range ..................... +1 °C to +45 °C
(device complies with specifications)
Permissible temperature range .................. 0 °C to +50 °C (data not guaranteed)
Max. permissible humidity .......................... 95%, non-condensing
Power supply
Input voltage (AC options) ......................... 100 V to 240 V AC, ±10%
(100 V to 240 V, +10% for SLV8100A in
analog TV mode)
Power frequency......................................... 47 Hz to 63 Hz, single-phase
Input voltage (DC options) ......................... +38 V to +72 V DC
Power consumption
DVB-T 10 W ......................................... ~ 130 W
Analog TV 250 W: ................................ ~ 800 W
Mechanical resistance
Vibration, sinusoidal ................................... 5 Hz to 150 Hz, max. 2 g at 55 Hz,
max. 0.5 g from 55 Hz to 150 Hz,
meets DIN EN 60068-2-6
Vibration, random ....................................... 10 Hz to 300 Hz,
acceleration 1.2 g (rms),
meets DIN EN 60068-2-64
Shock.......................................................... 20 g shock spectrum,
meets DIN EN 60068-2-27
and MIL-STD-810E
2100.4400.32
- 2.10 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
EMC ........................................................... ETSI EN 301489-1 / -14
ETSI EN 302296 / 302297
Rec. 1999/519/EC
Immunity to radiated interference .......... Up to 10 V/m
Safety ........................................................ EN 60950-1: 2001
CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1: 2003
UL 60950-1: 2003
Dimensions
Model 20 ............................................... 19", 2 HU
Models 30, 31 ....................................... 19", 3 HU
Weight
Models 20, 21 ....................................... 6 kg
Models 30, 31 ....................................... 12 kg
3.2
Specific Data: SLx8000 DTV
3.2.1
Supported Modulation Parameters
Length of transport packet ......................... 188 or 204 bytes
DVB
Coding and modulation .............................. In line with EN 300744 with following
parameters:
IFFT length ........................................... 2 k or 8 k (plus 4 k for DVB-H)
Modulation ............................................ QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM
Guard interval ....................................... 1/4, 1/8, 1/16 or 1/32 of useful symbol period
Inner code rate ..................................... 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 7/8
Hierarchy .............................................. = 1, 2 or 4
Channel bandwidth ............................... 6, 7, 8 MHz
SFN function .............................................. In line with TS 101 191
TPS and TX automatic .............................. In line with TS 101 191 (MIP) with MFN and
SFN
ATSC
Coding and modulation .............................. In line with ATSC Doc. A/53
Bandwidth .................................................. 6 MHz
2100.4400.32
- 2.11 -
E-3
Chapter 2
3.2.2
Design and Characteristics
Input Processing
– All ASI modes (continuous, packet, burst) in line with DIN EN 500083-9
– Input FIFO: 8 k ± 20 transport packets, burst
– Input switchover, manual and automatic
– Seamless input switchover
– Input monitoring
– MFN with stuffing and PCR correction
– FIFOs as buffers for dynamic delay changes
– MIP evaluation in compliance with TS 101 191 (DVB)
3.2.3
Precorrection
– Manual linear precorrection (up to 350 ns group delay, up to 2 dB frequency response)
– Manual nonlinear precorrection
– Nonlinear frequency response
– Limiter function
– Precorrection of amplifier asymmetry
3.2.4
Quality Data
SNR ........................................................... > 37 dB, typ. 40 dB
MER ........................................................... > 33 dB, typ. 40 dB
Shoulder attenuation ................................. > 37 dB, typ. 40 dB
Frequency response .................................. < ±0.5 dB
Group delay ................................................ < 10 ns
Carrier suppression .................................... < -50 dBc referenced to transmitter RMS power
Sideband suppression ................................ < -50 dBc referenced to transmitter RMS power
Phase noise
Frequency/carrier offset ............................. dBc/Hz:
10 Hz ......................................................... < -65
100 Hz ....................................................... < -90
1 kHz ......................................................... < -95
10 kHz ....................................................... < -100
100 kHz ..................................................... < -112
1 MHz ........................................................ < -130
Frequency stability ..................................... 10-7 / year
2100.4400.32
- 2.12 -
E-3
Chapter 2
3.2.5
Design and Characteristics
Nonharmonics and Harmonics
ATTENTION!
To comply with national standards on the antenna interface, the transmitter must only be
operated with an output bandpass!
– Harmonics:
Transmitter
2nd harmonic (1st harmonic)
3rd harmonic ( 2nd harmonic)
UHF, 100 W
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -20 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 69: < -40 dBc
< -55 dBc
UHF, 50 W
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -15 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -25 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -35 dBc
3rd harmonic:
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -40 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -50 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -60 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
UHF, 25 W
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -15 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -25 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -35 dBc
3rd harmonic:
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -40 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -50 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -60 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
UHF, 10 W
Ch 21 to Ch 30: < -10 dBc
Ch 31 to Ch 43: < -20 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -50 dBc
< -60 dBc
UHF, 5 W
Ch 21 to Ch 30: < -10 dBc
Ch 31 to Ch 43: < -20 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -50 dBc
< -60 dBc
UHF, 2 W
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -30 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -40 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -50 dBc
< -55 dBc
VHF, 100 W
Ch 05 to Ch 08: < -30 dBc
Ch 09 to Ch 15: < -40 dBc
< -55 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
VHF, 50 W
Ch 05 to Ch 08: < -30 dBc
Ch 09 to Ch 15: < -40 dBc
< -55 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
VHF, 25 W
Ch 05 to Ch 08: < -30 dBc
Ch 09 to Ch 15: < -40 dBc
< -55 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
– Out-of-band emissions: < -37 dB (due to shoulder attenuation)
– Nonharmonics: < -60 dB
2100.4400.32
- 2.13 -
E-3
Chapter 2
Design and Characteristics
3.3
Specific Data: SLx8000 Analog TV
3.3.1
Supported Video and Audio Standards
TV standards ............................................. B/G, M/N, D/K and I
Audio coding .............................................. Mono, IRT dual sound, BTSC, optional NICAM
3.3.2
Video Functions
– Input monitoring (sync-pulse width, period and amplitude)
– Black-level retention
– Evaluation of data line (audio mode)
– Amplitude control (using white pulse)
– Sync-pulse regeneration
– Receiver pre-equalization
– Vestigial sideband filtering
3.3.3
Audio Functions
– Input level adaptation
– Matrixing
– FM modulation
– Precorrection of audio phase (only with FM carrier, depending on video signal)
With NICAM model
– Coding and modulation in line with EN 300 163
– Single sideband filtering
3.3.4
Precorrection
– Manual linear precorrection (up to 250 ns group delay, up to ±2 dB frequency response)
– Manual nonlinear precorrection
– Nonlinear frequency response
– Dynamic adjustment of nonlinear precorrection depending on video content
– Precorrection of amplifier asymmetry
2100.4400.32
- 2.14 -
E-3
Chapter 2
3.3.5
Quality Data
3.3.5.1
With Standard Factory Precorrection
3.3.5.2
With Manual Postcorrection
Design and Characteristics
Video
S/N ratio ..................................................... 63 dB (> 200 kHz, < 5 MHz, CCIR-weighted)
Differential phase ....................................... ±3°
Differential amplitude ................................. 5%
VF frequency response ............................. ±0.5 dB
VF group delay .......................................... ±25 ns
Audio
FM signal-to-noise ratio -60 dB (CCIR weighted)
AF frequency response .............................. < 0.2 dB (preemphasis and deemphasis OFF)
AF total harmonic distortion ........................ < 0.5% (at ±30 kHz deviation)
3.3.5.3
Miscellaneous
Carrier suppression (with respect to vision carrier) -50 dBc
Phase noise
Frequency/carrier offset ........................ dBc/Hz:
10 Hz .................................................... < -65
100 Hz .................................................. < -90
1 kHz .................................................... < -95
10 kHz .................................................. < -100
100 kHz ................................................ < -112
1 MHz ................................................... < -130
Frequency stability ..................................... 10-7 / year
2100.4400.32
- 2.15 -
E-3
Chapter 2
3.3.6
Design and Characteristics
Nonharmonics and Harmonics
ATTENTION!
To comply with national standards on the antenna interface, the transmitter must only be
operated with an output bandpass!
– Harmonics:
Transmitter
2nd harmonic (1st harmonic)
3rd harmonic ( 2nd harmonic)
UHF, 250 W
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -20 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 69: < -40 dBc
< -55 dBc
UHF, 125 W
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -15 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -25 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -35 dBc
3rd harmonic:
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -40 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -50 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -60 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
UHF, 62 W
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -15 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -25 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -35 dBc
3rd harmonic:
Ch 21 to Ch 34: < -40 dBc
Ch 35 to Ch 43: < -50 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -60 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
UHF, 25 W
Ch 21 to Ch 30: < -10 dBc
Ch 31 to Ch 43: < -20 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -50 dBc
< -60 dBc
UHF, 12 W
Ch 21 to Ch 30: < -10 dBc
Ch 31 to Ch 43: < -20 dBc
Ch 44 to Ch 69: < -50 dBc
< -60 dBc
VHF, 250 W
Ch 05 to Ch 08: < -30 dBc
Ch 09 to Ch 15: < -40 dBc
< -55 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
VHF, 125 W
Ch 05 to Ch 08: < -30 dBc
Ch 09 to Ch 15: < -40 dBc
< -55 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
VHF, 62 W
Ch 05 to Ch 08: < -30 dBc
Ch 09 to Ch 15: < -40 dBc
< -55 dBc
4th harmonic: < -60 dBc
– Out-of-band emissions: < -30 dB
– Nonharmonics: < -60 dB
2100.4400.32
- 2.16 -
E-3
Chapter 2
3.4
Specific Data: Options
3.4.1
GPS Receiver (SLX8000B13)
Design and Characteristics
Minimum level ............................................ -128 dBm
3.4.2
DVB-T/-H Receiver (SLX8000B14) / DVB-T/-H Monitor
(SLX8000B15)
Frequency ranges ...................................... 170 MHz to 250 MHz (band III)
470 MHz to 860 MHz (band IV/V)
Input sensitivity .......................................... -80 dBm to 20 dBm 1
2100.4400.32
To be able to achieve the full dynamic range, the step attenuator setup must be optimized using TV Settings
> Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX > Setup > RF Attenuation Antenna.
- 2.17 -
E-3
Chapter 2
2100.4400.32
- 2.18 -
Design and Characteristics
E-3
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 3.0 -
E-1
Chapter 3
Installation
CONTENTS
1 Unpacking and Setting Up .............................................................. 1
1.1 Equipment Supplied .......................................................................................1
1.2 Unpacking Instrument ....................................................................................1
1.3 Setting Up Instrument ....................................................................................1
2 Connecting Cables .......................................................................... 2
2.1 Overview of Connectors ................................................................................2
2.2 Connecting Input Signals ..............................................................................5
2.3 Connecting External Reference Sources .....................................................5
2.4 Connecting Antenna System .........................................................................6
2.5 Preparing RF Loop .........................................................................................6
2.6 Connecting User Interface .............................................................................6
2.7 Connecting AC Power Supply .......................................................................7
2100.4400.32
- 3.01 -
E-2
Chapter 3
2100.4400.32
- 3.02 -
Installation
E-2
Chapter 3
Unpacking and Setting Up
1.1
Equipment Supplied
Installation
The following items are supplied as standard:
R&S SLx8000 low-power transmitter in one of the following versions:
– R&S SLV8002: 2 HU, band IV/V
– R&S SLV8005(A): 2 HU, band IV/V
– R&S SLV8010(A): 2 HU, band IV/V
– R&S SLV8025(A): 3 HU, band IV/V
– R&S SLW8025(A): 3 HU, band III
– R&S SLV8050(A): 3 HU, band IV/V
– R&S SLW8050(A): 3 HU, band III
– R&S SLV8100(A): 3 HU, band IV/V
– R&S SLW8100(A): 3 HU, band III
Power cable (DC options: non-assembled at one end)
Short-circuit connector for X32
This user manual
Note
The performance data for these transmitter variants is given in the section "Power Classes"
in the chapter "Design and Function".
1.2
Unpacking Instrument
Carefully remove the instrument from the carton and check the delivery for completeness against the delivery note.
1.3
Setting Up Instrument
The instrument can stand on its feet or be built into a 19“ rack. Depending on which model
is selected, 2 or 3 height units are required for installation in a 19" rack.
Note
2100.4400.32
Make sure the instrument is standing in a stable position and there is sufficient ventilation.
Make sure in particular that the flow of air through the inlets on the front panel and the outlets on the rear panel (fan) is not obstructed.
- 3.1 -
E-2
Chapter 3
Installation
Connecting Cables
WARNING!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before connecting any devices.
This will prevent injuries and damage to the devices.
2.1
Overview of Connectors
Fig. 1 Connectors on rear panel of R&S SLV8010
2100.4400.32
- 3.2 -
E-2
Chapter 3
Installation
Fig. 2 Connectors on rear panel of R&S SLV8050
Connectors on rear panel (DTV and ADTV)
No.
Label
Type
Connection
X7
POWER OUT
N female
RF output
X21
TS 1
BNC, female, 75
Transport stream input 1 (main signal;
with hierarchy: HP stream)
X22
TS 2
BNC, female, 75
Transport stream signal 2 (standby signal; with hierarchy: LP stream)
X23
EXT 1 PPS
BNC, female, 50
Input for seconds pulse from external
reference
X24
EXT REF
BNC, female, 50
Reference input, 5 MHz or 10 MHz,
-5 dBm to 20 dBm or TTL
X29
REF OUT
BNC, female, 50
Monitoring output for internal
1 PPS or 10 MHz signal
X30
ETHERNET
LOCAL
RJ45, female
Connection of a PC for local operation;
preset address at X30:
– IP address: 192.168.57.253
– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
X31
ETHERNET
REMOTE
RJ45, female
Network connection for remote access;
preset address at X31:
– IP address: 192.168.58.253
– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
X32
TX CONTROL
D-Sub, female (9-contact)
RF loop and CAN bus; connection for
parallel remote-control interface or N+1
system
Low-temperature connector or DC connection
AC voltage feed
X8
2100.4400.32
- 3.3 -
E-2
Chapter 3
Installation
Connectors on rear panel (additional connectors for ADTV)
No.
Label
Type
Connection
X20
VF
BNC, female, 75
Analog video input
X25
BTSC
BNC, female, 75
Analog audio input to BTSC standard
(M, N)
X26
NICAM DATA
BNC, female, 50
Digital data input for NICAM 728
X27
AUDIO 1
XLR, female, 600
Analog audio input AF1
X28
AUDIO 2
XLR, female, 600
Analog audio input AF2
Connectors on rear panel (depending on hardware option)
No.
Label
Type
Connection
X1
RECEIVER
N female, 50
Antenna input for DVB-T receiver
option (retransmitter)
X2
GPS ANTENNA
N female, 50
Connection for optional GPS antenna
X3
RECEIVER AUX
N female, 50
Second antenna input for DVB-T monitor option
Fig. 3 RF test output on front panel of R&S SLx8000
Connector on front panel
No.
2100.4400.32
Label
Type
Connection
RF MONITOR
SMA, female, 50
RF test output
- 3.4 -
E-2
Chapter 3
2.2
Installation
Connecting Input Signals
Inputs for digital TV
The input signals can be fed in ASI or SMPTE format.
1. Connect the first transport stream to X21 (TS 1). With hierarchical coding (DVB only),
X21 is the input for the HP stream.
2. If signal standby is required, connect a second transport stream to X22 (TS 2). With hierarchical coding, X22 is the input for the LP stream.
Inputs for analog TV
1. Connect the video signal to X20 (VF).
2. Feed audio signals according to signal type:
a) AF signals: Connect AF1 to X27 (AUDIO 1) and AF2 to X28 (AUDIO 2).
b) NICAM: If an external NICAM coder is used, additionally connect the NICAM 728
data stream to X26 (NICAM DATA).
Separate feed of the NICAM 728 data stream is unnecessary if the NICAM coder integrated in the transmitter is used.
c) BTSC: As an alternative to a) and b), connect a multiplex signal to X25 (BTSC).
Optional: Inputs for DVB-T/-H receiver and DVB-T/-H monitor
Depending on the options selected, connect the receive system to X1 and/or X3.
2.3
Connecting External Reference Sources
1. To increase frequency accuracy, connect an external reference source (5 MHz or 10
MHz) to X24 (EXT REF).
Note
Alternatively, the seconds pulse of an external 1 pps signal (at X23) or of the optional
internal GPS receiver (GPS antenna at X2) can be used as the frequency reference.
2. For SFN operation, additionally feed a 1 pps signal to allow time synchronization:
a) If the optional internal GPS receiver is used, connect the GPS antenna to X2
(GPS ANTENNA).
b) Alternatively, feed the 1 pps signal of an external reference source via X23
(EXT 1 PPS).
2100.4400.32
- 3.5 -
E-2
Chapter 3
2.4
Installation
Connecting Antenna System
WARNING!
Risk of RF burns. Before connecting the antenna cable, make sure that the instrument
cannot output RF at the output.
ATTENTION!
For EMC reasons, only cables with double shielding are to be used at the RF output.
Connect the antenna system to X7 (POWER OUT).
2.5
Preparing RF Loop
WARNING!
Risk of RF burns. Before putting the instrument into operation, make sure that the available interlock loop systems are in use.
Prepare the interlock loop system (if available) for connection to X32 (TX CONTROL ).
If no interlock loop devices are available in the transmitter system (only permissible with
low power), have the supplied short-circuit connector at the ready.
Note
The interlock loop is only closed after (!) startup (see next chapter) via X32 (TX CONTROL),
after which the instrument can then produce RF.
Note
To avoid unwanted electromagnetic emissions via the external interlock loop, the interlock
loop should be connected via the optional filter adapter (5302.6575.00).
2.6
Connecting User Interface
A PC or laptop can be connected for a more user-friendly way of operating the instrument
locally. Furthermore, it is also possible to connect the transmitter to a remote monitoring
network. An Ethernet link is used for connection.
Rohde & Schwarz recommends the use of an RJ-45 cable which complies with the CAT 7
specification.
Connecting a PC for local operation
Connect the PC to the interface X30 (ETHERNET LOCAL).
2100.4400.32
- 3.6 -
E-2
Chapter 3
Installation
Connecting to a remote monitoring network
Connect the IP network to the interface X31 (ETHERNET REMOTE).
2.7
Connecting AC Power Supply
The instrument is available with various power supply units:
– Option SLX8000B9: 100 V to 240 V AC +10 %, 150 W (24 V secondary)
– Option SLX8000B10: 48 V DC (38 V to 76 V DC), 150 W (24 V secondary)
– Option SLX8000B11: 100 V to 240 V AC +10 %, 1000 W (32 V secondary)
– Option SLX8000B12: 48 V DC (38 V to 76 V DC), 1000 W (24 V secondary)
ATTENTION!
The instrument can be damaged by an overvoltage. Make sure that the AC supply voltage
provided by your local power supply network complies with the specifications of the power
supply unit installed in your instrument.
Check the power cable for damage.
Instrument with AC power supply unit SLX8000B9/SLX8000B11
1. Set the power switch on the rear of the instrument to 0 (OFF).
2. Connect the instrument to the power supply using the supplied power cable.
Instrument with AC power supply unit SLX8000B10/SLX8000B12
Note
Since the instrument does not have its own power switch for disconnection from the AC
supply, the plug of the connecting cable must be regarded as the disconnecting device. It
must be ensured that the plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m). Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing
disconnection from the AC supply. If the transmitter is integrated in racks or systems, a disconnecting device must be provided at system level.
1. Actuate the external power disconnecting device (set to OFF position).
2. Connect the instrument to the power supply using the supplied power cable.
Pin assignment of DC options
SLX8000B10 (2 HU)
2100.4400.32
SLX8000B12 (3 HU)
- 3.7 -
E-2
Chapter 3
1) Negative, GND (-)
2) Protective
conductor (PE)
3) Positive (+)
2100.4400.32
- 3.8 -
Installation
1) Positive (+)
2) Negative, GND (-)
3) Protective
conductor (PE)
E-2
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 4
COMMISSIONING
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 4.0 -
E-1
Chapter 4
Commissioning
CONTENTS
1 General Information ......................................................................... 1
1.1 Preparations ....................................................................................................1
1.2 Preparing for Local Operation .......................................................................1
1.3 Changing User ID ...........................................................................................2
1.4 Operating Transmitter ....................................................................................3
2 Configuring Transmitter .................................................................. 4
2.1 Entering Basic Settings .................................................................................4
2.1.1 Setting Date and Time ..................................................................................4
2.1.2 Configuring Remote Connection ..................................................................5
2.2 Making Specific Settings for a TV Standard ................................................5
2.2.1 Selecting TV Standard: DVB, ATSC or Analog TV ......................................5
2.2.2 DVB(-T/H): Basic Settings, Coding, Signal Feed .........................................6
2.2.2.1
2.2.2.2
2.2.2.3
2.2.2.4
Entering Basic Settings ...................................................................................... 6
Setting TPS Parameters Manually ..................................................................... 7
Checking Delays under SFN Delay — SFN Mode Only ..................................... 9
Configuring Input Interfaces and Automatic Input Selection ............................ 10
2.2.3 ATSC: Signal Feed .....................................................................................12
2.2.3.1 Configuring Input Interfaces and Automatic Input Selection ............................ 12
2.2.4 Analog TV: Basic Settings, Video and Audio .............................................14
2.2.4.1
2.2.4.2
2.2.4.3
2.2.4.4
2.2.4.5
2.2.4.6
2.2.4.7
2.2.4.8
Entering Basic Settings .................................................................................... 14
Performing Video Control ................................................................................. 15
Setting White Limiter ........................................................................................ 16
Setting Sync-Pulse Regeneration .................................................................... 17
Performing Receiver Pre-Equalization and Diplexer Peaking .......................... 17
Adjusting AF Nominal Level and Level Adaptation to NICAM Coder ............... 18
Setting Audio Mode of Coder and Switching On Pilot Tone ............................. 19
Setting Sound Carrier/Nominal Deviation and Deviation Limiter ...................... 20
2.3 Selecting and Adjusting Reference Sources .............................................21
2.3.1 Selecting Reference Frequency Source and Determining Response on
Failure ........................................................................................................21
2.3.2 Setting Antenna Type for Internal GPS Receiver .......................................23
2.4 Setting Transmit Frequency ........................................................................23
2.5 Setting Output Power ...................................................................................23
2.6 Activating RF ................................................................................................25
2.7 Checking Status Displays and Clearing Logbook Entries .......................25
2100.4400.32
- 4.01 -
E-2
Chapter 4
2100.4400.32
- 4.02 -
Commissioning
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
General Information
This chapter describes the settings needed to generate the required RF signal with the correct frequency and correct level at the output of the exciter.
Transmitters are put into operation using the transmitter graphical user interface.
1.1
Preparations
Before you can put a transmitter into operation, it must first have been fully installed. Therefore, before switching on the instrument, check the following list to ensure that all connections have been made correctly:
1. Check whether the transmitter has been connected correctly (signal feed, reference
sources, remote-control interfaces; see the chapter "Installation").
2. Check whether the transmitter has been connected correctly to the AC supply (see the
chapter "Installation").
3. Also check the following points:
a) At RF output
Output network (antenna/dummy antenna, matrix, directional-coupler filter, channel
filter) connected correctly? Terminating resistor 50 and power-handling capacity
P > nominal transmitter power?
b) Interlock loop
In order to prevent inadvertent transmission while putting the transmitter into operation, make sure that the interlock loop at X32 is not yet (!) closed.
4. Check that all cable connections are fitted securely.
1.2
Preparing for Local Operation
The instrument can be operated locally in two ways:
– using the display and the menu keys on the front panel of the instrument
– using a web browser and PC which is connected to X30 (remote operation)
Note
In the following descriptions, it is assumed that the transmitter is operated locally from the
front panel. Detailed information on remote operation can be found in the chapter "Operating".
ATTENTION!
The instrument starts up with the most recently set parameters. In order to prevent damage resulting from an incorrect frequency setting, transmission must be avoided while the
transmitter is being put into operation:
Therefore do not close the interlock loop (see the section "Preparations").
2100.4400.32
- 4.1 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
1. Switch on the transmitter using the toggle switch (position I) on the rear of the instrument.
The transmitter boots up. After a few seconds, the system overview appears on the display.
Fig. 1 System overview on R&S SLx8000 display
2. Press the Local key so that the associated LED lights up.
The transmitter is now in Local mode and can be operated locally. You are automatically
logged on with the user ID "Operation".
Since operation rights do not permit you to set basic transmitter parameters, you must
change the user ID.
1.3
Changing User ID
You must have configuration rights to configure the instrument fully.
1. Press the MENU key (press and hold down) to call the context menu.
2. In the context menu, select the menu item Change User.
The Logon window opens. The current user ID is displayed to the right of Select user
from list.
Fig. 2 Changing user at display in local operation mode
3. Under Select user from list, select the user ID Configuration.
After confirming with OK, you are logged on again with configuration rights.
Note
2100.4400.32
No password needs to be entered in the case of local operation using the display and
menu keys (after factory setting).
- 4.2 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
1.4
Operating Transmitter
Note
Detailed information on operating the transmitter can be found in the chapter "Operating".
2100.4400.32
- 4.3 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
Configuring Transmitter
The following steps are the minimum requirement for correct transmitter operation:
– Setting the date/time (basic settings)
– Selecting the TV standard and parameterizing the coding
– Configuring the input interfaces
– Selecting and adjusting the reference sources
– Setting the transmission frequency
– Setting the output power
– Activating RF
Whereas the coding settings and input interface settings vary depending on the used TV
standard, the other steps are the same irrespective of the TV standard.
2.1
Entering Basic Settings
2.1.1
Setting Date and Time
1. Select System Setup > Date | Time.
The Date | Time window opens.
2. At first set the UTC time offset.
3. Afterwards set the current date and local time.
2100.4400.32
Setting item
Description
Date
For setting the current date
- 4.4 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Setting item
Description
Local Time
For setting the local time
Commissioning
Local time means the time of day or zone time at the station concerned.
Compared to world time (UTC = universal time coordinated), each time
zone has a positive offset (for zones east of Greenwich) or a negative
offset (for zones west of Greenwich). This offset is predetermined by the
time zone and is always a multiple of a full hour, or occasionally of half
an hour.
In some countries clock time is advanced by one hour in summer. The
time offset relative to UTC then changes accordingly.
UTC Time Offset
2.1.2
For entering the time offset between local time and UTC
Configuring Remote Connection
If a remote Ethernet connection is to be used, you must configure the interface X31 (ETHERNET REMOTE) in such a way that it is in the subnet of your remote monitoring system.
1. Select System Setup > Ethernet.
The Ethernet window opens.
2. Under Rem.IP Address and Rem.Subnet mask, set the appropriate IP address and subnet mask.
3. If a gateway is used, configure its IP address too.
4. Perform a reboot of the instrument.
2.2
Making Specific Settings for a TV Standard
2.2.1
Selecting TV Standard: DVB, ATSC or Analog TV
1. Select System Setup > Tx Type > Transmitter.
The Transmitter window opens.
2100.4400.32
- 4.5 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
2. Under Tx Type, select the required TV standard DVB, ATSC or ATV (Analog TV).
The transmitter reboots automatically if the TV standard is changed.
2.2.2
DVB(-T/H): Basic Settings, Coding, Signal Feed
2.2.2.1
Entering Basic Settings
1. Select TV Settings > DVB > Common.
The Common window opens.
2. Under Digital Standard, select the DVB-T or DVB-H mode.
3. Under Network Mode, select the required network mode MFN or SFN.
4. Under TPS Source, you determine whether the DVB parameters are to be read out from
the MIP or set manually.
5. Enter the other settings listed in the table below:
Setting item
Explanation
Digital Standard
Used to select the digital TV standard: DVB-T or DVB-H
Network Mode
Used to select the network operating mode: SFN or MFN
TPS Source
Used to set the source for the TPS parameters: MIP or manual presets
The TPS source can also be set in the TV Settings > DVB > TPS menu
window.
Cell ID Enable
Used to switch cell ID signaling on or off in the TPS
The cell ID itself is set in the TV Settings > DVB > TPS menu window. It
can also be retrieved from the MIP.
The Cell ID can only be retrieved from the MIP if Tx Automatic is activated and the Tx address is correctly set.
2100.4400.32
- 4.6 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
Setting item
Explanation
Tx Address
Used to set the transmitter address; address range: 0 to 65535
Setting the transmitter address is a precondition to reading Tx information (transmitter-specific settings) from the MIP. However, the information is only used if Tx Automatic is enabled.
Tx Automatic
Used to switch Tx Automatic on or off
If Tx Automatic is activated (and the transmitter address is set), the following Tx parameters are retrieved from the MIP:
Time Offset, Frequency Offset and Cell ID
Display
Explanation
Amplifier Control
Indicates the status of amplifier control
2.2.2.2
Setting TPS Parameters Manually
Note
You can only configure the TPS parameters manually if the Manual Presets setting is selected for TPS Source.
1. Select TV Settings > DVB > TPS.
The TPS window opens.
2. Set the following TPS parameters: Signal bandwidth, IFFT Length, Guard Interval and
modulation mode (Constellation).
3. Enter the other settings listed in the table below:
2100.4400.32
Setting item
Explanation
TPS Source
Used to set the source for the TPS parameters: MIP or manual presets
Display/
setting item
Explanation of
active or manually set TPS parameters
Bandwidth
Signal bandwidth
Display/setting: 5, 6, 7 or 8 MHz
- 4.7 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Display/
setting item
Explanation of
active or manually set TPS parameters
FFT Length
IFFT length
Display/setting: 2k or 8k; also 4k for DVB-H
Guard Interval
Guard interval
Display/setting: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16 or 1/32
Constellation
Modulation mode
Display/setting: QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM
Commissioning
With hierarchical coding, the value refers to the sum of constellation
points from HP and LP Stream; possible values are therefore: 16QAM or
64QAM
Alpha
Hierarchical parameter
Display/setting:
– No Hier: no hierarchical coding
– 1 H: hierarchical coding with = 1
– 2 H: hierarchical coding with = 2
– 3 H: hierarchical coding with = 3
1 H, 2 H or 3 H activates the hierarchical coding mode. However, this is
only possible if Constellation is set to 16QAM or 64QAM.
Cell ID
Cell ID
Display/setting: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The cell ID can only be retrieved from the MIP if Tx Automatic is activated and the Tx address is correctly set in the TV Settings > DVB >
Common menu.
For the purpose of signaling in the output signal (TPS), the Cell ID
Enable parameter must also be activated in the TV Settings > DVB >
Common menu.
Interleaver
Interleaver
Display/setting:
– nat: Default setting ("native") with standard function for DVB-T
– in depth: 8k interleaving for DVB-H with IFFT lengths of 2k and 4k to
improve transmission reliability (DVB-H parameter)
2100.4400.32
Code Rate [HP/LP]
Internal code rate (separate for HP and LP stream)
Display/setting: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 6/7
Time Slicing [HP/LP]
Time slicing flag (DVB-H parameter)
Display/setting separate for HP and LP stream:
– OFF: Default setting; no signaling via flag
– ON: A flag is set in the broadcast DVB signal. This flag informs the
receiver that at least one service in the DVB-H data stream uses time
slicing.
MPE FEC [HP/LP]
MPE FEC flag (DVB-H parameter)
Display/setting separate for HP and LP stream:
– OFF: Default setting; no signaling via flag
– ON: This flag informs the receiver that at least one service in the
DVB-H data stream uses the forward error correction for MPE (Multi
Protocol Encapsulation).
- 4.8 -
E-2
Chapter 4
2.2.2.3
Commissioning
Display/
setting item
Explanation of
active or manually set TPS parameters
Req. Data Rate
[HP/LP]
Displays the data rate required at the input for the currently active TPS
settings (see the TV Settings > Input > TS1(HP) menu and the TV Settings > Input > TS2(LP) menu)
Checking Delays under SFN Delay — SFN Mode Only
1. Select TV Settings > DVB > SFN Delay.
The SFN Delay window opens.
2. If necessary, enter a Static Delay and check whether the Dynamic Delay is between 0
and 1 second (if this is not the case, the single-frequency condition is violated).
Detailed information is given in the table below:
Display
Explanation
Maximum Delay
Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (MIP inserter)
to the transmitter antenna for regular transmission. This delay is set in
the MIP inserter and is the default for all transmitters of the SFN.
Network Delay
Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (MIP inserter)
to the input of the exciter. This delay depends on the used transmission
path.
Processing Delay
Minimum turnaround time of the signal by the exciter. This delay
depends on the DVB transmission parameters.
Dynamic Delay
Time by which signal processing is delayed artificially in order to achieve
the required time of transmission.
Total Delay
Actual turnaround time of the signal by the exciter. This time is the sum
of Processing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
Tx Offset Delay
Positive or negative offset (transferred in the MIP for the individual transmitter location) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of
transmission preset under Maximum Delay.
This delay is only displayed and activated if Tx Automatic has been activated and the Tx address of the transmitter is correct.
If Tx Offset Delay and Static Delay are present at the same time, their
effects are added together.
2100.4400.32
- 4.9 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
Setting item
Explanation
Static Delay
Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter
location) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission preset under Maximum Delay. The Static Delay is used to compensate differences between transmission systems from different
manufacturers.
If Static Delay and Tx Offset Delay are present at the same time, their
effect is added together.
Max Deviation Time
2.2.2.4
Maximum deviation in the calculated time of transmission which can be
corrected without interrupting transmission.
Default setting: 10 s
Configuring Input Interfaces and Automatic Input Selection
Setting signal source and data format for transport streams
1. Select TV Settings > Input > Input Config.
The Input Config window opens.
2. Under Source 1, set the signal source for transport stream 1:
a) Select BNC if transport stream 1 is fed via the instrument socket for TS1.
or
b) Select Rx if transport stream 1 comes from the internal receiver module (DVB-T/-H
receiver option).
3. Under TS Format 1, select the data format for transport stream 1. If AUTO is selected,
the data format is detected automatically.
Note
With hierarchy, the first signal source supplies the HP stream.
4. If necessary (signal standby, LP stream with hierarchy), configure a second transport
stream accordingly under Source 2 and TS Format 2.
Note
Transport stream 2 can be fed via either the instrument socket for TS2 or a (second) optional receiver module.
Setting automatic input switchover (not with hierarchy)
The following settings are used to preselect the operating input and to configure the behavior of the automatic input switchover.
2100.4400.32
- 4.10 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
1. Select TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic.
The Input Automatic window opens.
2. Select the active input and enter the other settings listed in the table below.
Setting item
Description
Preselect Input
For preselecting the active input
– INPUT 1: Operating input is TS 1.
– INPUT 2: Operating input is TS 2.
Autoswitch
Activates and deactivates automatic input switchover
In the event of a failure on the active operating input, the automatic system switches the input signal over automatically to the standby input.
The automatic switchover mode is defined by the following parameter
settings.
Seamless Switching
(DVB only)
Switches seamless input switchover on or off
– ON: In the event of a failure, input switchover takes place without a
break in transmission, provided that the data streams are synchronized at the operating and standby inputs.
– OFF: The Seaml. Switching function can be deactivated to allow the
automatic input switchover to be tested.
The function has no effect when automatic input switchover is deactivated.
Priority
– EQUAL: The preselected operating input and standby input have the
same priority. Once a switchover has taken place the system does not
normally switch back to the previously faulty operating input.
– PRIO: The preselected operating input is the priority input. Once a
switchover has taken place the system switches back to the preselected operating input as soon as the signal reappears.
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active.
Automatic Ready
After Change Over
Sets the behavior after switchover to the standby input
– ON: The automatic input signal system stays active after every
switchover and can return to the formerly perturbed input.
– OFF: Switches over to the standby input once. The automatic system
must be reset to "ready" manually by pressing the Reset Fault key.
The preselected operating input then becomes active again.
Check Time Forward
For setting a delay time (0 to 60 s) which must elapse before the
switchover to the standby input takes place in the event of a failure on
the operating input
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active.
2100.4400.32
- 4.11 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
Setting item
Description
Check Time Back
For setting a delay time (0 to 60 s) which must elapse before switching
back to the preselected operating input after switching over from the
standby input (which is no longer active)
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active and/or the
priority mode is set to EQUAL.
On Loss Of Input
For setting the behavior in the event of a defective input signal (synchronization error)
– No Mute: The output signal is not suppressed (only effective with
MFN)
– Mute: The output signal is suppressed if the data rate is incorrect (this
feature always applies to SFN)
Type Of Loss Of Input
Selection:
– Warning: If the input signal fails, only a warning will be generated.
– Fault: If the input signal fails, an additional sum fault will be generated
after the time set under Fail Delay Time has elapsed. In the case of
transmitter standby, switchover to the second transmitter takes place.
Fail Delay Time
For setting a delay time which must elapse after an input signal dropout
before a sum fault is generated.
2.2.3
ATSC: Signal Feed
2.2.3.1
Configuring Input Interfaces and Automatic Input Selection
Setting data format for transport streams
1. Select TV Settings > Input > Input Config.
The Input Config window opens.
2. Under TS Format 1, select the data format for transport stream 1. If AUTO is selected,
the data format is detected automatically.
3. Under TS Format 2, select the data format for transport stream 2 if a second signal feed
(signal standby) is used. If AUTO is selected, the data format is detected automatically.
Setting automatic input switchover
The following settings are used to preselect the operating input and to configure the behavior of the automatic input switchover:
2100.4400.32
- 4.12 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
1. Select TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic.
The Input Automatic window opens.
2. Select the active input and enter the other settings listed in the table below.
Setting item
Description
Preselect Input
For preselecting the active input
– INPUT 1: Operating input is TS 1.
– INPUT 2: Operating input is TS 2.
Autoswitch
Activates and deactivates automatic input switchover
In the event of a failure on the active operating input, the automatic system switches the input signal over automatically to the standby input.
The automatic switchover mode is defined by the following parameter
settings.
Seamless Switching
(DVB only)
Switches seamless input switchover on or off
– ON: In the event of a failure, input switchover takes place without a
break in transmission, provided that the data streams are synchronized at the operating and standby inputs.
– OFF: The Seaml. Switching function can be deactivated to allow the
automatic input switchover to be tested.
The function has no effect when automatic input switchover is deactivated.
Priority
– EQUAL: The preselected operating input and standby input have the
same priority. Once a switchover has taken place the system does not
normally switch back to the previously faulty operating input.
– PRIO: The preselected operating input is the priority input. Once a
switchover has taken place the system switches back to the preselected operating input as soon as the signal reappears.
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active.
Automatic Ready
After Change Over
Sets the behavior after switchover to the standby input
– ON: The automatic input signal system stays active after every
switchover and can return to the formerly perturbed input.
– OFF: Switches over to the standby input once. The automatic system
must be reset to "ready" manually by pressing the Reset Fault key.
The preselected operating input then becomes active again.
Check Time Forward
For setting a delay time (0 to 60 s) which must elapse before the
switchover to the standby input takes place in the event of a failure on
the operating input
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active.
2100.4400.32
- 4.13 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
Setting item
Description
Check Time Back
For setting a delay time (0 to 60 s) which must elapse before switching
back to the preselected operating input after switching over from the
standby input (which is no longer active)
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active and/or the
priority mode is set to EQUAL.
On Loss Of Input
For setting the behavior in the event of a defective input signal (synchronization error)
– No Mute: The output signal is not suppressed (only effective with
MFN)
– Mute: The output signal is suppressed if the data rate is incorrect (this
feature always applies to SFN)
Type Of Loss Of Input
Selection:
– Warning: If the input signal fails, only a warning will be generated.
– Fault: If the input signal fails, an additional sum fault will be generated
after the time set under Fail Delay Time has elapsed. In the case of
transmitter standby, switchover to the second transmitter takes place.
Fail Delay Time
For setting a delay time which must elapse after an input signal dropout
before a sum fault is generated.
2.2.4
Analog TV: Basic Settings, Video and Audio
2.2.4.1
Entering Basic Settings
1. Select TV Settings > ATV > Common.
The Common window opens.
Detailed information is given in the table below:
2100.4400.32
Setting item
Explanation
TV Standard
Used to select the ATV standard
IRT-NICAM
Setting: IRT or NICAM (for standards B|G, D|K, I, I1)
– IRT: Second sound subcarrier is frequency-modulated
– NICAM: Second sound subcarrier is modulated according to the
NICAM specification
- 4.14 -
E-2
Chapter 4
2.2.4.2
Commissioning
Setting item
Explanation
NICAM Mode
Used to select the NICAM mode (for standards B|G, D|K, I, I1):
– Coder: AF signal feed of AF1 and AF2 via the inputs AUDIO 1 and
AUDIO 2 as well as coding and modulation in the transmitter
– Modulator: Signal feed as NICAM 728 data stream via the digital input
NICAM DATA
NICAM Rolloff
Used to set the NICAM rolloff (for standards B|G, D|K, I, I1):
– Auto: NICAM rolloff is automatically set according to the selected TV
standard and in compliance with the NICAM specifications (recommended setting !)
– 40% / 100%: Manual setting of the NICAM rolloff
Sound Select
Used to select the number of sound subcarriers (for standards B|G, D|K,
I, I1, M1):
– Single Carrier: One sound subcarrier
– Dual Carrier: Two sound subcarriers
FM Input
Setting: AF 1 or BTSC (for standards M, N)
– AF 1: MONO audio mode, signal feed via input AUDIO 1
– BTSC: BTSC audio mode, signal feed via input BTSC
Performing Video Control
1. Select TV Settings > ATV > Vision > White Control.
The White Control window opens.
2. Make the required settings:
2100.4400.32
Setting item
Description
Automatic
Switches white control on or off.
Testline
Selects the test line for the white pulse.
The test line can be in the first or second field.
Gain Source
Selection of the source for fixed video gain in case offailure of the white
pulse with white control simultaneously switched on.
The options are as follows:
– MANUAL: For the gain, the manual settings under Manual Gain apply.
– MEMORY: The gain uses the most recently saved value for white
control.
Manual Gain
Manual setting of the video gain
The value which is set is the gain of the actuator as a percentage
referred to gain 1.
- 4.15 -
E-2
Chapter 4
2.2.4.3
Commissioning
Display
Description
Memory Gain
Display of the last value saved by the white control which can be used
for fixed video gain.
The value which is displayed is the gain of the actuator as a percentage
referred to gain 1.
Current Gain Source
Display of the active source for the video gain:
– Manual: Manual setting (see Gain Source)
– Memory: Memory for the white control (see Gain Source)
– Automatic: White control
White Amplitude
Input
Measured value for the white amplitude input
White Amplitude Output
Measured value for the white amplitude output
White Pulse Monitoring
Status display for the white pulse monitoring:
– NONE: The test line with the white pulse was not found
– OK: White pulse found and level OK
– < -40% / < -30% / > +30% / > +40%: The level of the white pulse deviates from the nominal value by the displayed value.
Setting White Limiter
1. Select TV Settings > ATV > Vision > White Limiter.
The White Limiter window opens.
2. Make the required settings:
2100.4400.32
Setting item
Description
Limiter
Switches the white limiter on or off.
Threshold
Sets the threshold for the white limiter.
Display
Description
Limiter Active
Status display for indicating if the white limiter responds.
- 4.16 -
E-2
Chapter 4
2.2.4.4
Commissioning
Setting Sync-Pulse Regeneration
1. Select TV Settings > ATV > Vision > Sync Pulse.
The Sync Pulse window opens.
2. Make the required settings:
Setting item
Explanation
Regeneration
Used to switch sync-pulse regeneration on or off
Sync Amplitude
Used to set the amplitude of the regenerated sync pulse (with regeneration switched on)
Display
Explanation
Sync Monitoring
Indicates the status of sync-pulse monitoring of the input signal. The following may be displayed:
– OK: A standard input signal is being applied
– no V: No V-pulse frame detected
– no H+V: No V and H-pulse frame detected
– too low: Sync-pulse amplitude is less than 50% of the nominal syncpulse amplitude; the processed signal is, however, available at the
encoder output
Sync Amplitude Input
Displays the measured input amplitude [mV] of the sync pulse. If the
selected scanning line is not found in the input signal, the measurement
value 0 mV is displayed.
Sync Amplitude
Output
Displays the measured output amplitude in [mV] of the sync pulse
2.2.4.5
Performing Receiver Pre-Equalization and Diplexer Peaking
Note
Use of the diplexer peaking function is recommended only after level control has been completed.
1. Select TV Settings > ATV > Vision > Equalizer.
The Equalizer window opens.
2100.4400.32
- 4.17 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
2. Make the required settings:
2.2.4.6
Setting item
Explanation
Diplexer
Used to switch the diplexer pre-equalization (diplexer peaking) on or off
Diplexer Peaking
Used to set the peaking in the range 0.1 dB to 2.5 dB at the band limit of
the upper sideband
Receiver
Pre-Equalization
Used to switch the receiver pre-equalization on or off
Adjusting AF Nominal Level and Level Adaptation to NICAM Coder
The functions available for sound adjustment depend on the selected audio standard.
1. Select TV Settings > Input > Sound >
a) Input B|G, D|K, I, M1 for IRT dual sound
b) Input M, N for FM mono sound
c) Input M, N BTSC for BTSC dual sound
d) Input NICAM Mod for FM mono sound with NICAM, Modulator mode (NICAM 728
data stream fed from an external source)
e) Input NICAM Cod for FM mono sound with NICAM, Coder mode (NICAM 728 data
stream generated in the transmitter itself)
The associated input window opens.
2. Make the required settings:
Note
2100.4400.32
The table shows all settings and displays, some of which are not available with all audio
standards.
- 4.18 -
E-2
Chapter 4
2.2.4.7
Commissioning
Setting item
Explanation
Nominal Level
[AF1 / AF2 / BTSC]
Used to set the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 and AF2 or a
BTSC signal
Gain Adjustment
NICAM [AF1 / AF2]
Used to adapt the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2
which is fed to the integrated NICAM coder
Preemphasis [FM]
Used to switch the pre-emphasis required by the respective TV standard
(50 s or 75 s) on or off for FM sound
Preemphasis
[NICAM]
Used to switch the pre-emphasis required by the TV standard on or off
for NICAM sound
Lowpass [FM]
Used to switch a low-pass filter on or off for FM sound
Display
Explanation
Current Input Level
[AF1 / AF2 / BTSC]
Indicates the current input level at the FM sound modulator for the signal
AF1, AF2 or BTSC as a percentage of the maximum drive level
Current Input Level
NICAM [AF1 / AF2]
Indicates the current input level at the NICAM coder for the AF signal
AF1 and AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level
Input Clipping FM
[AF1 / AF2]
If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 exceeds the maximum permissible input
level, the amplitude is limited. This is signaled by the Input Clipping status display.
Input Clipping BTSC
If the BTSC signal exceeds the maximum permissible input level, the
amplitude is limited. This is signaled by the Input Clipping status display.
Input Clipping NICAM
[AF1 / AF2]
If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 is amplified beyond the permissible input
level at the NICAM coder, the amplitude is limited. This is signaled by
the Input Clipping NICAM status display.
Setting Audio Mode of Coder and Switching On Pilot Tone
1. Select TV Settings > ATV > Sound > FM Audio Mode.
The FM Audio Mode window opens.
2. Make the required settings:
2100.4400.32
- 4.19 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Setting item
Description
Coder Mode
Setting of the audio mode.
Commissioning
The following settings are possible: Off, Mono, Stereo, Dual and Auto
(Dataline). The selected TV standard determines the assignment of the
audio inputs to the FM sound subcarriers.
The following settings have a special meaning:
– Off: Dual sound is set as the audio mode
– Auto (Dataline): The audio mode is read from theaudio data line in the
picture signal.
2.2.4.8
Dataline
Selects the audio data line present in the picture signal; this is necessary for the Coder Mode > Auto setting.
Pilot
Switches the pilot signal on or off; not active in conjunction with NICAM.
Pilot Gain
Sets the level for the pilot signal; not active in conjunction with NICAM.
Display
Description
Dataline Info
Display of the indication of the audio mode present in the audio data line
(N/A means there is no indication in the selected audio data line).
Current Audio Mode
Display of the audio mode that is currently set.
Current Pilot
Deviation
Display of the FM deviation for the pilot signal.
Setting Sound Carrier/Nominal Deviation and Deviation Limiter
1. Select TV Settings > ATV > Sound > FM Carrier.
The FM Carrier window opens.
2. Make the required settings:
2100.4400.32
- 4.20 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
Setting item
Explanation
Carrier 1/Carrier 2
Used to set the mode for FM sound subcarrier 1 or 2; the following settings are possible:
– Carrier OFF: Switches off the sound subcarrier
– Modulation OFF: Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation
– ON: Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation
Nom. Deviation
[Carrier 1/Carrier 2]
Used to set the nominal FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1 and 2
Deviation Limiter
Used to switch the deviation limiter for the FM sound subcarrier on or off
Limiter Threshold
Used to set a threshold at which the deviation limiter is triggered
Warning Above
Used to set a threshold at which the deviation limiter warning is activated
In most cases, it is recommendable for Limiter Threshold and Warning
Above to have the same value.
Display
Explanation
Current Deviation
[Carrier 1/Carrier 2]
Indicates the current FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1 and 2
Limitation
[Carrier 1/Carrier 2]
Status display which indicates whether the deviation limiter has triggered
2.3
Selecting and Adjusting Reference Sources
2.3.1
Selecting Reference Frequency Source and Determining
Response on Failure
1. Select TV Settings > Reference > Common.
The Common window opens.
2. Under Reference, select a reference frequency source and determine how the transmitter is to respond if a reference source fails.
2100.4400.32
- 4.21 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
Detailed information is given in the table below:
Setting item
Description
Reference
Selects the reference frequency source. The following settings are possible:
– Internal: Operation without external reference frequency source
– External 5 MHz: Operation with external 5 MHz reference applied
– External 10 MHz: Operation with external 10 MHz reference applied
– External 1pps: Operation with external time reference (1 pps)
– Internal GPS: Operation with optional internal GPS receiver
Monitoring Output
For selecting the signal which will be delivered via the REF OUT monitor
socket on the rear panel of the instrument. The following settings are
possible:
– Off: Monitoring output disabled
– 10 MHz: OCXO stabilized 10-MHz frequency
– 1 PPS Generated: Internally generated PPS
– 1 kHz: 1-kHz signal
– 1 PPS Input:
– If reference = Internal/external xx: External PPS
– If reference = Internal GPS: PPS from GPS receiver
OCXO Adjust
Setting for adjusting the internal OCXO frequency (for "Internal" mode)
Mute on PPS Fail
Used to determine the behavior in SFN mode in the event of failure of
the external time reference. The following settings are possible:
– off: The output signal is not suppressed
– only at startup: The output signal is suppressed at startup until a valid
1 pps signal is detected; if the 1 pps signal fails after successful synchronization, the output signal is no longer suppressed
– after fail delay time: The output signal is suppressed if the 1 pps signal fails for longer than the period specified under Fail Delay Time
This is the recommended setting for operation in SFN mode.
Mute on Ref. Fail
Used to determine the behavior in SFN and MFN mode in the event of
failure of the external reference frequency source. The following settings
are possible:
– off: The output signal is not suppressed
– only at startup: The output signal is suppressed at startup until a valid
reference source is detected; if the reference source fails after successful synchronization, the output signal is no longer suppressed
– after fail delay time: The output signal is suppressed if the reference
source fails for longer than the period specified under Fail Delay Time
This is the recommended setting for operation in SFN mode.
Fail Delay Time
If a reference source fails, the time specified here must elapse before
the output signal is suppressed. The setting is effective if "after fail delay
time" is set under Mute on PPS Fail or Mute on Ref. Fail.
Selection: 0 to 24 hours; 0 hours = no delay time
2100.4400.32
- 4.22 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
2.3.2
Setting Antenna Type for Internal GPS Receiver
Note
The following setting is only necessary if you use the optional internal GPS module.
1. Select TV Settings > Reference > GPS > Status.
The GPS > Status window opens.
2. Under Antenna type, select the connected antenna type:
a) active: The active antenna is supplied with 5 V DC from the GPS module.
b) passive: The antenna is not supplied with DC voltage from the GPS module.
Note
2.4
Longer cables can be used with active antennas.
Setting Transmit Frequency
1. Select TV Settings > RF Out > Synthesizer.
The Synthesizer window opens.
2. Under Frequency, set the transmitter frequency.
2.5
Setting Output Power
Note
The transmitter has an internal power test point which means that in most cases a separate
measuring instrument is not necessary.
1. Select TV Settings > RF Out > Amplifier.
The Amplifier window opens.
2100.4400.32
- 4.23 -
E-2
Chapter 4
Commissioning
2. Under Output Power, set the required output power.
3. If necessary, set a warning threshold for low output power under RF Fail Limit.
Detailed information is given in the table below:
Setting item
Explanation
Output Power
Used to set the required output power of the transmitter
(the output power should not exceed the specified nominal power)
RF Fail Limit
Used to set a threshold value in dB for low RF output power. The threshold is referenced to the power output set under Output Power.
If the power drops below the set threshold value, an RF Fail fault is generated.
Default setting: -3 dB
Display
Symbol
Explanation
Actual Power
Status
OK
Power display is valid
Power display is invalid
The internal power meter of an amplifier is overloaded; the actual
output power may be above the displayed power.
RF Fail
Amplifier
2100.4400.32
- OFF -
RF power at the output of the output stage OK or transmitter
switched off
RF power is below the threshold specified under RF Fail Limit
OK
No warning at the output stage
Output stage signals a sum warning
Display
Explanation
Actual Power
Current forward power of the transmitter
- 4.24 -
E-2
Chapter 4
2.6
Commissioning
Activating RF
1. Switch off transmission mode by pressing the RF ON/OFF key.
2. Connect available interlock loop systems to X32 (TX CONTROL)
or with low power
if no interlock loop system is provided, short-circuit X32 (TX CONTROL) using the supplied short-circuit connector.
3. Switch transmission mode on again by pressing the RF ON/OFF key.
Both the RF ON/OFF LED and the RF PRESENT LED should now light up to indicate
that the transmitter is delivering power at the output.
2.7
Checking Status Displays and Clearing Logbook
Entries
The status displays can be used to check installation and configuration of the transmitter. If
a transmitter is ready to operate, no warnings or faults will be indicated.
Furthermore, it is also recommended to clear existing logbook entries after the transmitter
has been put into operation.
1. Check the status menus of your transmitter according to the TV standard you have set.
a) For DVB, select Status > TV DVB > Device Status and then Status > TV DVB >
Input Status.
b) For ATSC, select Status > TV ATSC.
c) For Analog TV, select Status > TV ATV.
2. Select Logbook > Summary.
The Summary window opens.
3. In the context menu, select the item Clear logbook.
All logbook entries are cleared.
2100.4400.32
- 4.25 -
E-2
Chapter 4
2100.4400.32
- 4.26 -
Commissioning
E-2
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 5
OPERATING
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 5.0 -
E-1
Chapter 5
Operating
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Operation ............................................................... 1
1.1 Local and Remote Operation .........................................................................1
1.2 Local Operation (Using Display and Keypad) ..............................................2
1.2.1 System Overview .........................................................................................2
1.2.2 Menu Keys ...................................................................................................3
1.2.3 Operating Structure ......................................................................................4
1.2.3.1
1.2.3.2
1.2.3.3
1.2.3.4
1.2.3.5
Activating Local Operation ................................................................................. 4
System Overview — Top Menu Level ................................................................ 4
Navigation in Menu System ................................................................................ 4
Selecting and Editing Settings ............................................................................ 6
Context Menu ..................................................................................................... 8
1.2.4 Changing User ID (Authorization) ................................................................9
1.3 Remote Operation and Remote Control .....................................................12
1.3.1 Installation and Configuration .....................................................................12
1.3.2 Login ...........................................................................................................14
1.3.3 Browser-Based Operation ..........................................................................15
1.3.3.1 End of Session ................................................................................................. 20
1.4 User Administration .....................................................................................21
1.4.1 Creating, Changing and Deleting Users .....................................................22
1.4.2 Closing Active Sessions .............................................................................24
1.5 Monitoring and Control via SNMP ..............................................................25
1.5.1 Installation ..................................................................................................25
1.5.1.1
1.5.1.2
1.5.1.3
1.5.1.4
Settings on Transmitter Side ............................................................................ 25
Settings on Manager Side ................................................................................ 26
Testing SNMP Communications ...................................................................... 27
Configuration .................................................................................................... 30
2 Menu Structure .............................................................................. 34
2.1 SLx Menu Tree ..............................................................................................34
2.2 Bookmarks ....................................................................................................37
2.3 Other Menu Paths (Web Browser Only) .....................................................38
2.3.1 Menu Item "Parameter Set" ........................................................................38
2.3.2 Menu Path "Precorrection" .........................................................................38
2.3.3 Menu Item "TxTool" ....................................................................................38
2.3.4 Menu Item "Storage" ..................................................................................39
2100.4400.32
- 5.01 -
E-2
Chapter 5
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
Operating
Menu Item "User Administration" ...............................................................39
Menu Item "SNMP Administration" .............................................................39
Menu Item "User Manual" ..........................................................................39
Menu Item "Visit R&S Website" ..................................................................40
3 Status of Transmitter: Status Menu ............................................. 41
3.1 Status Displays, Warnings and Fault Messages .......................................41
3.2 Status > Device Status (with DVB) ..............................................................41
3.3 Status > Device Status (with ATV) ..............................................................44
3.4 Status > Device Status (with ATSC) ............................................................46
3.5 Status > Input Status (DVB Only) ................................................................47
4 Event Memory: Logbook Menu .................................................... 50
4.1 Logbook > Summary/Status/Warning/Fault ...............................................50
4.2 Logbook Context Menu ................................................................................51
5 Input Parameters: TV Settings > Input Menu .............................. 52
5.1 TV Settings > Input > Input Config (DTV only) ...........................................52
5.1.1 Checking Measured Data Rate ..................................................................53
5.2 TV Settings > Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX Submenu
(Only DVB-T/-H with Installed DVB-T/-H Receiver Option) .......................54
5.2.1 TV Settings > Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX > Setup ...........................54
5.2.2 TV Settings > Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX > TPS ..............................55
5.2.3 TV Settings > Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX > Status ..........................55
5.3 TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic (DTV Only) ....................................56
5.3.1 Automatic Input Switchover ........................................................................58
5.3.2 Behavior with Defective Input Signal ..........................................................59
5.4 TV Settings > Input > VF (ATV Only) ...........................................................59
5.4.1 Input Amplitude ..........................................................................................59
5.5 TV Settings > Input > Sound Menu (ATV Only) ..........................................60
5.5.1 Input Level at Analog Audio Coder .............................................................61
5.5.2 Input Level at NICAM Coder ......................................................................61
5.5.3 TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input B|G, D|K, I, M1 .................................61
5.5.4 TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input M, N .................................................62
5.5.5 TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input M, N BTSC .......................................63
5.5.6 TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input NICAM Mod .....................................63
5.5.7 TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input NICAM Cod ......................................64
2100.4400.32
- 5.02 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
6 RF Generation: TV Settings > RF Out Menu ................................ 65
6.1 TV Settings > RF Out > Amplifier ................................................................65
6.2 TV Settings > RF Out > Synthesizer ...........................................................66
6.3 TV Settings > RF Out > Output ....................................................................67
6.4 TV Settings > RF Out > IQ Adjust ................................................................67
6.5 TV Settings > RF Out > Precorrection ........................................................68
7 DVB Settings: TV Settings > DVB Menu ...................................... 70
7.1 TV Settings > DVB > Common ....................................................................70
7.2 TV Settings > DVB > TPS .............................................................................71
7.3 TV Settings > DVB > SFN Delay ..................................................................73
7.3.1 Distribution of Delays on Timeline ..............................................................75
7.4 TV Settings > DVB > Monitor / Monitor AUX Submenu
(Only DVB-T/-H with Installed DVB-T/-H Monitor Option) .........................75
7.4.1 TV Settings > DVB > Monitor / Monitor AUX > Setup ................................76
7.4.2 TV Settings > DVB > Monitor / Monitor AUX > TPS ...................................77
7.4.3 TV Settings > DVB > Monitor / Monitor AUX > Status ...............................77
7.5 TV Settings > DVB > Test Signals ...............................................................78
7.5.1 Arrangement of Test Signals in Output Frequency Spectrum ....................79
8 ATSC Settings: TV Settings > ATSC Menu .................................. 80
8.1 TV Settings > ATSC > Common ..................................................................80
9 ATV Settings: TV Settings > ATV Menu ....................................... 81
9.1 TV Settings > ATV > Common .....................................................................81
9.2 TV Settings > ATV > Vision Menu ...............................................................82
9.2.1 TV Settings > ATV > Vision > White Control ..............................................82
9.2.2 TV Settings > ATV > Vision > White Limiter ...............................................83
9.2.3 TV Settings > ATV > Vision > Sync Pulse ..................................................84
9.2.4 TV Settings > ATV > Vision > Equalizer .....................................................84
9.3 TV Settings > ATV > Sound Menu ...............................................................85
9.3.1 TV Settings > ATV > Sound > FM Audio Mode ..........................................85
9.3.1.1 Audio Mode ...................................................................................................... 86
9.3.1.2 Audio Data Line ................................................................................................ 86
9.3.1.3 Pilot Signal ....................................................................................................... 86
9.3.2 TV Settings > ATV > Sound > FM Carrier ..................................................86
9.3.2.1 FM Deviation .................................................................................................... 87
9.3.3 TV Settings > ATV > Sound > FM Precorrection .......................................88
9.3.3.1 Sound Phase Shifter ........................................................................................ 88
2100.4400.32
- 5.03 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
9.3.3.2 Computation of Characteristic Curve ............................................................... 89
9.3.4 TV Settings > ATV > Sound > NICAM Audio Mode ...................................89
9.3.5 TV Settings > ATV > Sound > NICAM Carrier ...........................................89
10 Reference Sources: TV Settings > Reference Menu .................. 91
10.1 TV Settings > Reference > Common ...........................................................91
10.1.1 Reference Frequency Source ....................................................................92
10.1.2 Operation in Single-Frequency Network (SFN) ..........................................93
10.1.3 Holdover Mode (If Reference Frequency Fails) .........................................93
10.2 TV Settings > Reference > GPS Submenu .................................................93
10.2.1 TV Settings > Reference > GPS > Status ..................................................94
10.2.2 TV Settings > Reference > GPS > Satellites ..............................................95
11 Basic Settings: System Setup Menu ............................................ 96
11.1 System Setup > Ethernet .............................................................................96
11.1.1 Preset IP Addresses ...................................................................................97
11.2 System Setup > Com-Port ...........................................................................97
11.3 System Setup > SNMP Submenu ................................................................98
11.3.1 SNMP > General Menu Window ................................................................99
11.3.2 SNMP > Manager Menu Window .............................................................100
11.3.3 SNMP > Alarmsinks Menu Window ..........................................................100
11.4 System Setup > Date | Time .......................................................................101
11.5 System Setup > Option Keys Menu ..........................................................101
11.5.1 System Setup > Option Keys > Status .....................................................102
11.5.2 System Setup > Option Keys > Install ......................................................103
11.5.3 System Setup > Option Keys > Deactivations ..........................................104
11.5.4 System Setup > Option Keys > HW Options ............................................105
11.6 System Setup > Tx Type Submenu ...........................................................105
11.6.1 System Setup > Tx Type > Transmitter ....................................................106
11.6.2 System Setup > Tx Type > Configuration ................................................107
11.6.3 System Setup > Tx Type > Time Scheduler .............................................107
11.7 System Setup > Device Info Menu ............................................................108
11.7.1 System Setup > Device Info > Device ......................................................109
11.7.2 System Setup > Device Info > Boards > Coder/RF Board/Amplifier/GPS
Board/Receiver/ParIO ..............................................................................109
12 Other Menus ................................................................................. 111
12.1 Multiple Parameter Sets: Parameter Set Menu ........................................111
2100.4400.32
- 5.04 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
12.2 Saving Transmitter Information: Menu Item "TxTool"
(Web Browser Only) ...................................................................................112
12.2.1 Functions in LogBooks Window ...............................................................114
12.3 Saving Transmitter Data: Storage Menu (Web Browser Only) ...............115
12.4 Menu Item "SNMP Administration" (Web Browser Only) .......................115
13 Introduction to Manual Precorrection ........................................ 116
13.1 Launching Precorrector GUI .....................................................................116
13.2 Operating Functions ..................................................................................118
13.2.1 Operating Fields .......................................................................................118
13.2.2 Graphics Areas .........................................................................................120
13.2.3 Characteristic Curves ...............................................................................120
13.3 Setting Linear Precorrection .....................................................................124
13.3.1 Main Function ...........................................................................................124
13.3.2 Linear Precorrection .................................................................................124
13.4 Setting Nonlinear Precorrection ...............................................................126
13.4.1 Main Function ...........................................................................................127
13.4.2 Nonlinear Precorrection ............................................................................127
13.5 Setting Nonlinear Frequency Response Precorrection ..........................129
2100.4400.32
- 5.05 -
E-2
Chapter 5
2100.4400.32
- 5.06 -
Operating
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Introduction to Operation
The R&S SLx8000 transmitter can be operated in the following ways:
– Local operation via the display and menu keys on the front panel of the device
– Operation via the web browser
– Monitoring and control via SNMP
If the device is operated via the web browser of a connected PC/client computer, two modes
are possible:
– Remote operation via a directly connected PC
– Remote control via a remote network client
1.1
Local and Remote Operation
Fig. 1 LOCAL key (with LED) for switching between local and remote operation
Local operation
To allow on-site configuration, the instrument must be set to local. In local operation mode,
the user can enter parameter settings using the instrument keys or using a PC connected
to ETHERNET LOCAL (X30). In this mode, remote access is restricted to value queries.
To switch to local operation, press the LOCAL key (the associated LED lights up).
Remote operation
To allow remote operation, the instrument must be set to remote. In remote operation mode,
settings can be changed via the ETHERNET REMOTE interface (X31). On-site configuration (using the keypad or via X30) is not possible in this operating mode.
To deactivate local operation, press the LOCAL key again (the associated LED goes out).
2100.4400.32
- 5.1 -
E-2
Chapter 5
1.2
Local Operation (Using Display and Keypad)
1.2.1
System Overview
Operating
Fig. 2 System overview on instrument display (front panel)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
Note
Display indicating which input is active
TV standard
Nominal power
Status of active input
Status of reference input
Sum warning display
Sum fault display
Muting display
Display indicating new logbook entries
Display indicating connection to higher-level R&S NetCCU800 switchover unit
Forward (F) and reflected (R) power, voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR)
Display indicating whether transmitter is delivering power
In the system overview, the TV standard/nominal power and the transmitter name are displayed alternately.
Status displays in system overview
Status
Message
Meaning
Active input
Ok
Valid signal is present at the active input
Signal at the active input is invalid or not detected
Signal at the active input is faulty
- OFF -
External reference frequency is present and is OK
– or –
External reference frequency is not present (it is not
required)
Re
External reference frequency is faulty and the fail delay
time set in the Reference menu has expired
Sum warning
One or more warnings are active
Sum fault
One or more faults have occurred
Muting display
RF output signal is disabled by the signal processing
unit; the RF PRESENT LED does not light up even with
RF ON
Reference input
2100.4400.32
- 5.2 -
E-2
Chapter 5
1.2.2
Operating
Status
Message
Meaning
Logbook entries
LoG
New entries have been made in the logbook since the
logbook was last opened
NSU connect
Co
Transmitter is connected to a higher-level R&S
NetCCU800 switchover unit (NSU)
Status of transmitter output
RF
Transmitter is delivering power
- OFF -
RF output has been deactivated by the user (RF OFF)
Transmitter is not delivering any power although the RF
output is enabled (RF ON)
Menu Keys
Fig. 3 Menu operation
Key
Meaning / function
OK / MENU
OK:
– Confirms an entry or selection
MENU:
– In system overview: Starts the menu control function
– From a menu: Calls the context menu
BACK / HOME
BACK:
– In a setting window: Cancels the entered value, provided
that it has not yet been confirmed with OK
– In the general menu: Goes back one step to the last
selected menu
HOME:
– Returns from the menu tree to the system overview.
CURSOR KEYS
: Navigation in the menu tree
: Navigation to a digit in an entered value
: Increments or decrements a number
A number of keys are assigned two functions. The following applies:
2100.4400.32
- 5.3 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
– Press the key briefly = The function indicated on the key is executed
– Press the key longer = The function indicated above the key is executed
1.2.3
Operating Structure
1.2.3.1
Activating Local Operation
In order to enter settings on the instrument locally, enable local mode.
Press the Local key so that the associated LED lights up.
Note
Various authorization levels protect against unauthorized access to critical system settings.
In local operation via keyboard and display you work by default with the factory preset user
ID Operation (which authorizes you to make settings that directly affect transmitter operation). The section "Change User ID (Authorization)" shows how you can log on using another user ID.
1.2.3.2
System Overview — Top Menu Level
Display the system overview as follows:
Press and hold down the HOME key.
1.2.3.3
Navigation in Menu System
This is how you navigate within the menu system:
1. Press and hold down the MENU key.
The context menu for the system overview is called.
The context menu for the system overview contains items used to call the SLX menu
tree, to directly access individual menu paths (shortcuts such as DVB, Logbook or System) as well as the context commands Reset Fault for resetting stored error messages
and Change User for changing the user ID.
Fig. 4 Context menu for system overview
1)
2)
3)
4)
2100.4400.32
Resets saved error messages
Opens the SLx menu tree
Shortcut to DVB menu path
Too many items to be displayed simultaneously (scroll down using the cursor keys to display other items)
- 5.4 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
2. In the context menu:
Use the cursor keys to navigate to the required entry item and confirm with OK.
A directory menu with the selected menu tree or menu path is displayed.
The single arrow or double arrow in the top right-hand corner of the menu indicates the
direction in which you can scroll the list.
Note
3. Within the menu tree:
Use the cursor keys to select a lower-level menu path or a menu window and confirm with OK or .
Items with an arrow pointing to the right lead to lower-level menu paths. Items without
an arrow symbol open menu windows for setting or displaying parameters.
Note
Fig. 5 In menu tree
1)
2)
3)
4)
Path
Not all available items are shown on display (here: scroll direction DOWN)
Item opens a menu window
Item opens a further menu path
4. Within a menu window:
Use the cursor keys to select a parameter and confirm with OK to adjust this parameter.
Fig. 6 Menu window (top: System Setup > Date/Time; bottom: System Setup > Ethernet)
1) Parameters with double arrow: setting can be changed.
2) Parameters with key symbol: setting not possible because user does not have appropriate authorization or
transmitter is in remote operation mode
3) Parameters without symbol: display only, setting not possible
Use the MENU key to call a context menu for the currently displayed setting window.
2100.4400.32
- 5.5 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Use the BACK key to go back one step in the menu structure (also from the Help windows);
you can also use BACK to cancel an entered value as long as you have not already confirmed it with OK.
Use the HOME key to exit the menu structure and return to the system overview.
Alternative method of opening menus
By briefly pressing the OK key, you can call the SLx menu tree directly from the system
overview.
Fig. 7 SLx menu tree
1.2.3.4
Selecting and Editing Settings
Note
Only those parameters identified by a double arrow can be adjusted.
Locked and variable settings
Depending on the user rights concerned and the type of access (local or remote access)
some or all processing parameters can be locked. These include restrictions arising from
the actual constellation chosen. An appropriate symbol in front of the parameter value
shows whether or not a parameter can be changed at this time.
Symbol
Meaning
The present user can change the setting. A change takes effect straight away.
The present user can change the setting. For the setting to take effect, a restart a)
must be carried out.
The setting cannot be changed at the present time. Possible reasons:
– The user does not have the necessary rights. b)
– Access is via the remote port whereas the instrument is in local mode.
– Access is local whereas the instrument is in remote mode.
Setting is not possible in this constellation.
- none -
This parameter value is for a display; it cannot be set.
a) To restart, run the Restart command from the System Setup > Tx Type > Transmitter context menu.
b) The Info command from the context menu gives information on the necessary user rights among other
things.
2100.4400.32
- 5.6 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Examples:
1) Setting can be changed, but the instrument needs to be restarted
2) Setting can be changed; a change takes effect straight away
1) Due to insufficient user rights, the selected parameter cannot be changed at this time
2) Operation access rights are needed in order to change this setting
Making a selection using the Selection Editor
Fig. 8 Selecting value
1. Select the setting using the cursor keys .
2. Confirm the selection with OK.
Your setting is saved and displayed in the menu window.
3. Press the HOME key to finish menu editing.
Entering data via the Text Editor
Fig. 9 Entering values
2100.4400.32
- 5.7 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
1) Entry line
2) Selectable characters
3) Command line
1. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the entry position.
2. To enter characters, move to the required character using the cursor keys and then confirm with the OK key.
The selected character appears in the entry line at the cursor position.
or
To delete characters, set the cursor after the character you wish to delete, then use the
cursor keys to select Del char and confirm with the OK key.
The character to the left of the cursor position is deleted.
3. To save changes (current entry in the entry line), select Enter text using the cursor keys
and then confirm with the OK key.
This closes the editor, stores the changes and displays them in the menu window.
Note
Enter text will work only if the instrument is set to "local" and authorization to change
parameters is held. Otherwise the only way to exit from the editor is to use Discard.
or
To close the editor without saving the changes, select Discard using the cursor keys and
then confirm with the OK key.
The editor closes and you return to the menu window. Your changes are not saved.
4. Press the HOME key to finish menu editing.
Note
If you select the Fix Editor command in the context menu (see section "Context Menu"),
the editor will remain open until you close it by pressing the Back key.
1.2.3.5
Context Menu
The context menu contains function- and content-oriented commands which can be applied
to the currently displayed menu.
The context menu can be called from any position using the MENU key.
Fig. 10 Context menu
You can find the content-oriented commands in the description for the menu window concerned. The function-oriented commands are listed and described below:
2100.4400.32
- 5.8 -
E-2
Chapter 5
1.2.4
Operating
Command
Explanation
Info
Help texts for the respective menu window/menu item
Open
Opens the editor or the selection window for setting the parameters
(same effect as pressing the OK key)
Edit
Used to edit a menu item (alternative to the OK key)
Edit Offline
Used to edit a menu item offline; changes are only saved when Submit
Changes (context menu) is selected
Submit Changes
Saves changes made offline
Edit Online
Used to edit a menu item online; standard setting which can only be
changed by selecting Edit Offline
Function Menu
Not yet implemented
Change User
Used to change the user profile
Logbook
Calls the logbook
System
Not yet implemented
Enter Text
In editor only: For saving entries (alternative to the 'Enter text' command
in the editor command line)
Discard
In editor only: For disregarding entries (alternative to the 'Discard' command in the editor command line)
Fix Editor
In numerical editor only: The editor remains open for further editing after
entries have been saved or discarded
Live Mode
In numerical editor only: The set numerical value becomes active at
once and not just after it is confirmed with the OK key
Changing User ID (Authorization)
Various authorization levels protect against unauthorized access to critical system settings.
In local operation via keyboard and display you work by default with the factory preset user
ID Operation (which authorizes you to make settings that directly affect transmitter operation).
Note
You can change, create or delete user profiles with the aid of the user administration facility,
which you call up via the web browser (see section "User Administration").
From the Change User context menu, you can log on in any menu under a different user
ID. No password is required to change the user ID under local control (according to the factory default). You can also protect access to the display by entering a password.
2100.4400.32
- 5.9 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Fig. 11 Changing user at display in local operation mode
You can select a user profile by clicking Select user from list.
The following factory-default user profiles are available for local operation:
Password a)
User profile
Description
Configuration
Authorization to set basic transmitter parameters, e.g.
Setup
Maintenance
Authorization to perform maintenance tasks, e.g. software updates
Operation
Authorization to make settings that directly affect
transmitter operation
Query
Read-only authorization
Config-Engl
Authorization to set basic transmitter parameters, e.g.
setup; this ID also changes the menu language to
English (irrespective of the preset language, e.g. Chinese)
a) By default the password (factory setting 1234) is needed only for browser-based operation. Every user can
change his/her own password via the user administration program.
Note
In the event of a power failure, the instrument resets to the Operation authorization level.
Changing user at display without entering a password
In the following example a user profile "Schmidt" has been set up in user administration.
The user has obtained authorization for local operation.
1. From the context menu, call the Change User command.
2. Use Select user from list to select the required user, e.g. Configuration, and confirm
your choice with OK.
2100.4400.32
- 5.10 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
You are then locked on again with the rights of your chosen user. The Logon menu is automatically closed after a short while and the display once again shows the menu that was
open before the change of user.
Change of user via the display by entering a password (example)
In the following example a user profile "Schmidt" has been set up in user administration.
The user has obtained authorization for local control, but must enter a password.
1. From the context menu, call the Change User command.
2. Go to Select user from list and select the user Schmidt .
The "" in angle brackets tells you that a password is needed.
3. Select the Type password command.
2100.4400.32
- 5.11 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
4. Enter the password in the editor.
5. Use the Logon command from the context menu to log on.
User "Schmidt" is then logged on:
1.3
Remote Operation and Remote Control
You need a Web browser in order to operate the system from a PC or via remote control.
Note
Depending on their rights, logged-on users can monitor the instrument or control all of its
functions. There is no difference between PC control and remote control with respect to this
functionality.
The instrument contains the network connections for operation by PC or remote control as
standard.
1.3.1
Installation and Configuration
Connecting a PC/network
Remote operation: Connect a PC to the X30 interface (ETHERNET LOCAL) of the R&S
SLx8000 using an RJ-45 cable.
2100.4400.32
- 5.12 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Remote control: Connect the remote monitoring network to the X31 interface (ETHERNET REMOTE) of the R&S SLx8000 using an RJ-45 cable.
Setting IP addresses at transmitter
To allow the R&S SLx8000 to communicate with a local PC or a remote network client, the
IP address of the used Ethernet interface of the transmitter must be in the IP subnet of the
PC or remote monitoring network.
You can enter the address data required for communication directly via the SLx8000 display.
Note
Alternatively, you can also adapt the IP address of your PC to the subnet of the transmitter
under Windows and retain the factory setting for the local network interface X30 (IP address
= 192.168.57.253, network mask = 255.255.255.0). In this case, configure the network address of your PC to, for example, 192.168.57.100/255.255.255.0.
1. On the instrument display, select the System Setup > Ethernet menu.
Fig. 12 Entering IP address data
2. Enter the address data for the local interface X30 under Loc.IP Address and Loc.Subnet mask.
3. Enter the address data for the remote-control interface X31 under Rem.IP Address and
Rem.Subnet mask.
Note
The transmitter must be restarted if the network settings are changed.
The following requirements must be fulfilled before you can operate the transmitter using
your browser:
– Javascript must be activated
– "Java Platform Standard Edition" (min. version 1.5) must be installed and activated.
The next section uses Microsoft Internet Explorer to explain how you can check whether
these conditions have been met or what changes you need to make.
Note
Please note that the settings described here need not match your current browser version
one hundred percent.
ATTENTION!
Please note that the modified settings described here may adversely affect the security of
your Internet connections.
All necessary changes and settings can be found in the Tools > Internet Options menu of
your Internet Explorer.
2100.4400.32
- 5.13 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Checking and adapting settings for Java applets:
1. Select the Security tab.
2. For the Internet zone, select the Adapt Level option.
3. In the tree structure, go to Scripting > Scripting of Java applets and select the Enable
option.
Installing Java (Sun) JRE if necessary; checking and adapting settings
1. Select the Advanced tab.
2. Check whether the entry Java (Sun) JRE ... is present and enabled.
3. If necessary, download and install (standard installation) the Java Runtime Environment
from the Sun website "www.java.com".
4. Then select the Internet Explorer's Advanced tab again and check whether the software
is installed and enabled.
1.3.2
Login
Note
To be able to operate the instrument via a PC connected locally, the instrument must be set
to local mode (press the LOCAL key so that the appropriate LED lights up).
1. Start the browser on your PC or network client.
2. Enter the IP address of the Ethernet interface on the instrument with which you are making contact.
The login screen appears.
3. Enter the desired identification together with the password (see table) and click on the
Logon button (R&S).
The web GUI opening screen appears.
Note
Logging on in this way starts a new session on the instrument web server.
Factory-set user IDs
2100.4400.32
User ID
Authorization
Password
Configuration
Allows you to set basic transmitter parameters; e.g. setup
1234
- 5.14 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
User ID
Authorization
Password
Maintenance
Allows you to perform maintenance tasks; e.g. software
update
1234
Operation
Allows you to make settings that directly affect transmitter
operation
1234
Query
Read-only authorization
1234
Guest
Read-only authorization – see Query
1234
Config-Engl
Same as Configuration authorization; this ID also
changes the menu language to English (irrespective of
the preset language, e.g. Chinese)
1234
Superuser
For configuring, creating and deleting user profiles, and
for displaying and deleting active sessions; no authorization for setting transmitter parameters – see Query
1234
Can't log on?
Logging on can fail for the following reasons:
– Three other users already logged on via the web browser. The maximum permitted number of simultaneous sessions has been reached. On the other hand it is always possible
to log on as Superuser.
– Incorrect ID and/or password entered.
After three failed attempts at logging on, the requesting IP address is prevented from
logging on for 30 minutes.
1.3.3
Browser-Based Operation
The following entry screen appears after logon:
2100.4400.32
- 5.15 -
E-2
Chapter 5
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
Operating
System Overview: current transmitter status
Measure Values: displays the forward and reflected power
Navigator: display and navigation through the transmitter menus
Menu window: displays the menus selected in the Navigator
Control panel: elements for navigating within the menu system and for displaying and editing the menu entries
Context menu (in the example, the remotely logged-on user cannot execute commands (key symbol) because
the instrument is set to local operation)
Transmitter name (default setting: SLx8000)
User name (as per login)
Group assignment (authorization level)
Session type: "Session is remote" indicates that logon took place via the remote Ethernet interface; "Session
is local" indicates that the user logged on via the local Ethernet interface
Number of users logged on using web browser
System Overview
The System Overview window provides an overview showing the current status of the
transmitter and its components.
2100.4400.32
- 5.16 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
1) Transmitter name and TV standard/nominal power displayed alternately
2) L/R = local/remote
Measure Values
The current forward power and reflected power are displayed in the Measure Values window.
Note
The function is to be implemented in a future software release.
Navigator
The navigator shows the tree structure of all transmitter menus. You can open the individual
folders and menus by double-clicking with the mouse. The selected menus are displayed
in the menu window.
2100.4400.32
- 5.17 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
1) Folder
2) Menu
Menu window
The menu window shows the menu selected in the Navigator window.
1) Double-arrow symbol: Entry can be changed
Control panel
You can use the control panel to navigate within the menu structure and menus and to
change settings. You activate the individual control elements using the mouse or keyboard.
2100.4400.32
- 5.18 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
1) Used for switching between menu entries, for accessing editable values and for entering numeric values; clicking the cursor keys (up/down) increments or decrements a number (corresponds to the cursor keys on the
keyboard)
2) Used for editing (switch to edit mode) and confirming settings (corresponds to Enter key on the keyboard)
3) Corresponds to the UP and DOWN cursor keys
4) Used for quickly switching between menu items, for quickly accessing editable values and for quickly entering
numeric values; can be rotated using the mouse
5) Used to move one step back to the menu last selected; also used to cancel settings that have not yet been
confirmed with OK
6) Back to Status menu
7) Displays the context menus for the current menu window or menu item (standard context menus: Info: help
texts and, in the case of menu items, also indicates which user rights are required to allow changes to be made; Open: opens a menu or menu item; Edit: for editing the entry; Edit Offline: item can be edited without the
change being applied immediately; Submit Change: submits an item edited offline); see also "Context Menu"
under "Local Operation"
8) Not enabled in this software version
Locked and variable settings
Depending on the user rights concerned and the type of access (local or remote access)
some or all processing parameters can be locked. These include restrictions arising from
the actual constellation chosen. An appropriate symbol in front of the parameter value
shows whether or not a parameter can be changed at this time.
Symbol
Meaning
The present user can change the setting. A change takes effect straight away.
The present user can change the setting. For the setting to take effect, a restart a)
must be carried out.
The setting cannot be changed at the present time. Possible reasons:
– The user does not have the necessary rights. b)
– Access is via the remote port whereas the instrument is in local mode.
– Access is local whereas the instrument is in remote mode.
Setting is not possible in this constellation.
2100.4400.32
- 5.19 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Symbol
Meaning
- none -
This parameter value is for a display; it cannot be set.
Operating
a) To restart, run the Restart command from the System Setup > Tx Type > Transmitter context menu.
b) The Info command from the context menu gives information on the necessary user rights among other
things.
Examples:
1) Setting can be changed; instrument must, however, be restarted
2) Setting can be changed; change becomes effective immediately
1) Selected parameter cannot be changed at present (due to insufficient user rights)
2) Operation rights are required to change the setting
1.3.3.1
End of Session
Use the Logoff button to log off from the system correctly. If you close the browser window
without logging off, the session is automatically terminated after two minutes at most.
If the present connection was cut (e.g. because the unit was restarted), a popup window
tells you that you need to log on again. Logging on again opens a new session.
2100.4400.32
- 5.20 -
E-2
Chapter 5
1.4
Operating
User Administration
The user administration facility is available in conjunction with browser-based operation.
The settings that you make in the user administration facility are (provided that no password
is required) also valid for menu access via local operation.
You can use the user administration facility to
– change user profiles (users and access rights)
– create new user profiles
– delete user profiles
– close active sessions
The ID Superuser with the factory-set password 1234 gives you extensive user administration rights.
1. Log on as Superuser.
2. Select User Administration in the Navigator window.
The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed.
2100.4400.32
Display
Meaning
Select
Selects the user to be processed
Name
User ID
Logged on
The user is not logged on (No) or is logged on once/several times (X
times) at the system
- 5.21 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Display
Meaning
Web browser
The user ID and authorization permit operation via the web browser
(Yes, No)
Front panel
The user ID and authorization permit local operation (Yes, No)
Access right
Authorization to access transmitter parameters
Is Admin
Additional user administration authorization (configuration, creation and
deletion of user profiles)
The following users are factory-set. Only the password can be changed for these users.
1.4.1
User ID
Authorization
Password
Configuration
Allows you to set basic transmitter parameters; e.g. setup
1234
Maintenance
Allows you to perform maintenance tasks; e.g. software
update
1234
Operation
Allows you to make settings that directly affect transmitter
operation
1234
Query
Read-only authorization
1234
Guest
Read-only authorization – see Query
1234
Config-Engl
Same as Configuration authorization; this ID also
changes the menu language to English (irrespective of
the preset language, e.g. Chinese)
1234
Superuser
For configuring, creating and deleting user profiles, and
for displaying and deleting active sessions; no authorization for setting transmitter parameters – see Query
1234
Creating, Changing and Deleting Users
Creating users
1. Select Add new user.
2100.4400.32
- 5.22 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
2. Create the required user profile.
Entry/selection
Explanation
Name:
User ID (case-sensitive)
Password:
Must be at least 6 characters in length (case-sensitive)
Retype password:
Enter the password again (case-sensitive)
Web browser
The user ID permits menu access via the web browser
Front panel
The user ID permits local operation
Access right
Selects a factory-set authorization level
Is admin
The user is also given user administration rights (configuration, creation and deletion of users; no access to the user profiles Superuser and Guest)
3. Confirm your entries with Add user; clicking Reset discards your entries.
Changing users
Note
All users have the right to change their own password.
1. Mark the required user.
2. Select Change selected user.
2100.4400.32
- 5.23 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
3. Change the user profile in the way described under "Creating users".
4. Confirm your changes with Change User; clicking Reset discards your changes.
Deleting users
1. Mark the required user.
2. Select Delete selected user.
The user is deleted.
1.4.2
Closing Active Sessions
If you are logged on as Superuser, you can view detailed information on logged-on users
and close active sessions.
1. After logging on, select Show session list.
2. Mark the session (the user) that you want to close.
3. Select Delete selected session.
The marked session is closed.
2100.4400.32
- 5.24 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
4. Return to the previous browser window by clicking Show user list.
1.5
Monitoring and Control via SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used for monitoring and controlling a
wide variety of different units in a network. Detailed information about this topic can be
found under http://www.wikipedia.org/.
A description of the unit - the MIB (Management Information Base) - must be loaded in the
central unit ("manager") from which the transmitters are monitored.
A monitored unit contains a program ("agent") which can answer queries from the manager
and execute commands. Furthermore, the agent may of its own accord generate a message and send it to the manager. In this way, the central unit can be informed of a fault.
1.5.1
Installation
The MIBs required for monitoring and controlling a transmitter are stored as a ZIP archive
directly in the transmitter control unit and can be downloaded from there using any networkcompatible unit. All of the information required for configuration is contained in the MIBs
themselves.
When the transmitter is put into operation, both the agent in the transmitter and the manager must be configured. Additional steps may be necessary if the transmitter is connected
via routers, firewalls or similar devices as they may block data packets.
The XX8000 transmitter family supports the versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.
Alarms can be sent as v1Traps, v2Traps or v2Informs.
Several destinations can be set for fault messages (alarm sinks).
Several communities can be set with Read Only authorization and Read/Write authori-
zation.
1.5.1.1
Settings on Transmitter Side
You can make settings yourself via the local display (if available), the web server or SNMP.
The menu windows of the SNMP menu contain all the settings that are required for accessing a transmitter.
Note
2100.4400.32
Changes to these settings are adopted immediately. The device does not need to be restarted.
- 5.25 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Note
Detailed information about the individual parameters can be found in the descriptions of the
respective menu windows.
1.5.1.2
Settings on Manager Side
To be able to monitor and control a transmitter with SNMP, the MIB of the device and a program which can interpret the MIB must be available on the manager side.
You can load all available MIBs from any device using a web browser.
1. Log on using the web browser and select the SNMP Administration menu.
MIBs from Rohde&Schwarz and IRT are available. MIBs from IRT allow transmitters to
be linked using SNMP irrespective of the manufacturer. They are, however, limited with
respect to their functionality. When using IRT MIBs, you can select the "Inhibit Status"
for local operation (in the same way as for the parallel contacts). If this function is activated, no alarms/traps are sent when the transmitter is in local mode. You can activate/
deactivate this function using Inhibit Status in the SNMP > General menu window.
The MIBs have the naming convention RS-XX8000---MIB. An example is RS-XX8000-ATV-TX-MIB for signal transmitters
for analog TV.
Examples of MIBs and contents:
2100.4400.32
MIB
Description
RS-COMMON-MIB
Contains general Rohde&Schwarz definitions
RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB
Contains definitions which all XX8000 transmitters fulfill (e.g. type
plate, configuration)
RS-XX8000-DVB-TXMIB
Contains definitions for DVB single transmitters, passive exciter
standby, active and passive output-stage standby
RS-XX8000-DVBNP1-MIB
Contains definitions for DVB n+1 systems
RS-XX8000-DVBNTX-MIB
Contains definitions that an R&S NetCCU800 provides as access for
n different, independent DVB transmitters
- 5.26 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
MIB
Description
RS-XX8000-DVB-TXREC-MIB
Contains definitions for the optional DVB receiver in a transmitter
RS-XX8000-DVBNP1-REC-MIB
Contains definitions for the optional DVB receiver(s) in an n+1 system
RS-XX8000-FM-TXMIB
Contains definitions for FM single transmitters with passive exciter
standby and active and passive output-stage standby
RS-XX8000-FM-NP1MIB
Contains definitions for FM n+1 systems
RS-XX8000-ATV-TXMIB
Contains definitions for analog TV single transmitters with passive
exciter standby and active and passive output-stage standby
RS-XX8000-ATVNP1-MIB
Contains definitions for analog TV n+1 systems
2. Save the required ZIP file to your PC.
3. Load the following MIBs:
a) RS-COMMON-MIB
b) RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB
c) MIB of the standby concept or option
A detailed description of the MIBs, the information that they contain and the associated options is given below.
1.5.1.3
Testing SNMP Communications
SNMP communication is properly set up if you have loaded the MIBs in your program and
you are using the correct IP address of the transmitter and the correct community. For queries and settings you must set the SNMP version in your manager; the transmitters detect
the used protocol automatically.
The following query can be used as a simple test:
2100.4400.32
- 5.27 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
In the example above, a transmitter with the IP address 10.123.10.7 queries the OID (ObjectIdentifier:
unique
designation
of
data
point)
serialNumber
(.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.1.1.2). The reply from the agent is 100111.
Using a further test, you can check whether the transmitter sends an alarm message in the
event of an error and whether this message reaches the alarm destinations. To do so, set
an OID sendTestTrap (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.1.2.3) to the value 2, which triggers
a testTrap (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.2.0.1). This alarm is sent to all receivers which
have been entered for the alarms (Trapsinks, see above).
This type of fault message functions in a slightly different way than that used for querying
and setting values (default: UDP Port 161 for SET/GET and UDP Port 162 for alarms).
2100.4400.32
- 5.28 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
The following illustration shows that the testTrap has been received correctly by the unit
with the serial number 100111.
Known problems
If querying the data does not work or if you do not receive an alarm, check the following:
– Has the network been connected correctly? Does the SNMP connection function exclusively via the remote Ethernet interface of the device (R&S NetCCU800: X5 – NETLINK,
R&S Sx800/SX801: X2, R&S xLx8000: X32 – ETHERNET REMOTE)?
– Are the network settings (IP address, gateway) correct?
– Has the correct Community been entered for accessing the manager and the transmitter
(case-sensitive)?
– Is a PC firewall blocking incoming SNMP packets?
2100.4400.32
- 5.29 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
– Has the program which receives alarms been started and correctly configured?
– In large networks: Is a router or firewall blocking the SNMP packets?
– Is message suppression (Inhibit Status in the SNMP > General menu) activated?
1.5.1.4
Configuration
This chapter provides an overview of the available properties.
RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB
This MIB contains general data that supports every unit:
– type plate: serial number, software version, etc
– SNMP configuration: table for alarm destinations and alarm versions
– triggering of a test trap
– counter for counting the transmitted traps
– list of the alarm messages last transmitted
– parameters which are used in several other MIBs
This information always concerns the unit that is being monitored by means of SNMP, for
example the NSU in an n+1 system.
RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-MIB
This MIB contains the parameters for:
– the standby concepts "single transmitter", "passive exciter standby", "active outputstage standby" and "passive output-stage standby"
– all power classes (low-power, medium-power and high-power)
– air-cooled and liquid-cooled transmitters
Different parameters are available depending on the system being queried. For example,
cmdTxOpModeExcAutomatic (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.1.1.1.7) gives the reply
NoSuchName if you query a single transmitter since this transmitter does not have an automatic exciter function. It is easy to find out which parameters are valid by checking the
"module compliances" (e.g. under .1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.2).
Example: DVB configuration, passive exciter standby, medium power, optional DVB receiver module with two inputs.
Valid MIBs:
– RS-COMMON-MIB
– RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB
– RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-MIB
– RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-REC-MIB
The valid OIDs for the transmitter are contained in the "Module Compliance" path. The OID
contains references to the individual groups.
2100.4400.32
- 5.30 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Fig. 13 RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-MIB
1)
2)
3)
4)
Name and OID for DualDrive MediumPower
Reference to groupEvents - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.1.1
Reference to groupDualDriveMP - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.1.4
Reference to groupAlarmDualDriveMP - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.1.5
Fig. 14 List of parameters (excerpt) for groupDualDriveMP
1) Name and OID for DualTuner
2) Reference to groupDualTuner - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.2.5.1.3
3) groupAlarmDualTuner - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.2.5.1.5
The groups contain all valid OIDs. The valid OIDs for the receiver module are contained in
the "Module Compliance" path of the RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-REC-MIB. The OID contains
references to the individual groups. The groups contain all valid OIDs.
RS-XX8000-DVB-NP1-MIB
This MIB contains all the parameters required for any DVB n+1 system, irrespective of the
following features of the individual transmitter:
– variant
– power class
– cooling system
2100.4400.32
- 5.31 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Once again, unavailable parameters receive the reply NoSuchName, e.g. parameters from
the transmitter A8 if only a 4+1 system is available (see module compliances under
.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.2).
Setting alarms
The transmitter-specific alarms offer an extensive range of configuration possibilities.
Depending on the available system, it is possible to set detailed alarms: for example, for
every item of status information in every amplifier in every rack of every transmitter in a medium-power n+1 system. In addition, it is also possible to assign a freely selectable priority
and to check the current status.
In the illustration above, the following information is contained in the highlighted row (depending on the used MIB; here: DVB n+1 medium-power system):
Position of code
number
Meaning of position
Value
Meaning of value
Transmitter
Transmitter TxB
Output stage
Output stage A
Transmitter rack
Transmitter rack No. 1
Amplifier
Amplifier No. 4
Event
84
Amplifier ON/OFF
Tab. 1 "Instance" column (1.1.1.4.84) in numeric order
Column
Meaning
Value
Explanation
eventTxName(6)
Designation of event
txAmpPowerOn(84)
Amplifier ON/OFF
eventTxMask(7)
Message for event
disable(2)
No alarm is sent
eventTxPriority(8)
Priority for event
Value freely selectable
by customer
Default setting when
supplied: 1
eventTxEvent(9)
Current status of
amplifier
active(1)
(inactive(2))
Amplifier ON
(Amplifier OFF)
Tab. 2 Meaning of other columns
The columns containing the value Not accessible are "index" columns (identified by IDX).
OIDs of these columns cannot be queried; they are used for internal purposes only.
2100.4400.32
- 5.32 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Example: DVB, N+1, low power
Valid MIBs:
– RS-COMMON-MIB
– RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB
– RS-XX8000-DVB-NP1-MIB
Valid OIDs in "Module Compliance" path for N+1 low power:
– Name: rsXx8000DVBNplus1LP
– OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.2.2
Groups:
– groupNsuLP - 1.36.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.6
– groupAlarmNsuLP" - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.7
– groupTxLP - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.8
– groupAlarmTxLP - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.9
– groupEvents - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.5
2100.4400.32
- 5.33 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Menu Structure
The transmitter software branches to different navigation areas. The areas SLx, Bookmarks
and Parameter Set are also accessible via the SLx8000 display, whereas the other areas
are only available using the web browser.
Navigation areas of transmitter software
SLx
Bookmarks
Parameter Set
Precorrection
TxTool
Storage
User Administration
SNMP Administration
User Manual
Visit R&S website
Note
The following description of the menus in the SLx menu tree is based on local operation
using the display and menu keys.
Certain menus are only visible if the software option for the respective TV transmission
standard is activated.
2.1
SLx Menu Tree
Level 1 >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
Level 4 >
See section
Status >
Device Status
Input Status
3.2 (DVB)
3.3 (ATV)
3.4 (ATSC)
Input Status
Logbook >
3.5 (DVB only)
Summary
2100.4400.32
- 5.34 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Level 1 >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
Operating
Level 4 >
See section
Status
Warning
Fault
TV Settings >
Input >
Input Config
5.1
Receiver /
Receiver AUX
Setup
5.2.1
TPS
5.2.2
Status
5.2.3
Input Automatic
VF
5.3
a)
5.4
Sound a) >
Input B|G, D|K, I,M1
5.5.3
Input M, N
5.5.4
Input M, N BTSC
5.5.5
Input NICAM Mod
5.5.6
Input NICAM Cod
5.5.7
RF Out >
Amplifier
6.1
Synthesizer
6.2
Output
6.3
IQ Adjust
6.4
Precorrection
6.5
Common
7.1
TPS
7.2
SFN Delay
7.3
Test Signals
7.5
DVB >
2100.4400.32
- 5.35 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Level 1 >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
Operating
Level 4 >
See section
Setup
7.4.1
TPS
7.4.2
Status
7.4.3
Monitor /
Monitor AUX
ATSC >
Common
8.1
Common
9.1
ATV >
Vision >
White Control
9.2.1
White Limiter
9.2.2
Sync Pulse
9.2.3
Equalizer
9.2.4
FM Audio Mode
9.3.1
FM Carrier
9.3.2
FM Precorrection
9.3.3
NICAM Audio Mode
9.3.4
NICAM Carrier
9.3.5
Sound >
Reference >
Common
10.1
GPS >
Status
10.2.1
Satellites
10.2.2
System Setup >
2100.4400.32
Ethernet
11.1
Com-Port
11.2
- 5.36 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Level 1 >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
Operating
Level 4 >
See section
SNMP >
General
11.3.1
Manager
11.3.2
Alarmsinks
11.3.3
Date | Time
11.4
Option Keys >
(web browser only)
Status
11.5.1
Install
11.5.2
Deactivations
11.5.3
HW Options
11.5.4
Transmitter
11.6.1
Configuration
11.6.2
Time Scheduler
11.6.3
Device
11.7.1
Boards >
11.7.2
Tx Type
Device Info >
Coder
RF Board
Amplifier
GPS Board
Receiver/Monitor
AUX
Receiver/Monitor
Par I/O Board
a) Only visible if the software option for ATV is activated.
2.2
Bookmarks
The Bookmarks menu item leads to a list of bookmarks that you have previously set with
the aid of Add to bookmarks (context menu).
2100.4400.32
- 5.37 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Each bookmark forms a link to an actual menu window that you can call directly without having to navigate at great length throughthe menu tree.
2.3
Other Menu Paths (Web Browser Only)
2.3.1
Menu Item "Parameter Set"
Level 1 >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
Parameter Set >
2.3.2
Parameter
Setting items:
– Load settings from
– Save settings to
– Copy set x to y
– Swap set x and y
– Parameter Set 1 .. 8
Displays:
– Loaded Set
– Operation Stat
– Current Set Changed
Menu Path "Precorrection"
The navigation area is the interface to the precorrector GUI (integrated software for transmitter precorrection with individual web interface).
Level 1 >
Level 2 >
Precorrection >
Level 3 >
a)
Parameter
Setting items:
– Start Precorrector-GUI
a) The precorrector GUI starts as a JAVA applet in its own window.
2.3.3
Menu Item "TxTool"
You can use this menu item to start a separate web application in order to forward logbook
or instrument information to the PC. Operation of the TxTool is explained in the section
"Saving transmitter information: TxTool menu item“.
Level 1 >
TxTool >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
a)
Parameter
Separate web browser interface
a) When you double-click the menu item, depending on the browser used either a new window or a new tab will
open.
2100.4400.32
- 5.38 -
E-2
Chapter 5
2.3.4
Operating
Menu Item "Storage"
Level 1 >
Storage >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
a)
Parameter
Setting items:
– Save parameter settings into file
– Recall parameter settings from file
a) When you double-click the menu item, depending on the browser used either a new window or a new tab will
open.
2.3.5
Menu Item "User Administration"
Level 1 >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
Parameter
Setting items for users with Superuser
rights:
– Add new user
– Change selected user
– Delete selected user
– Show session list
User Administration
> a)
Setting items for all other users:
– Change my password
Displays:
– List of available users
a) When you double-click the menu item, depending on the browser used either a new window or a new tab will
open.
2.3.6
Menu Item "SNMP Administration"
Level 1 >
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
SNMP Administration> a)
Parameter
Setting items:
– Please click here to download MIBs (provided by IRT).
a) When you double-click the menu item, depending on the browser used either a new window or a new tab will
open.
2.3.7
Menu Item "User Manual"
Level 1 >
User Manual >
2100.4400.32
Level 2 >
Level 3 >
a)
Parameter
Links to PDF download:
– Deutsches Benutzerhandbuch
– English User Manual
- 5.39 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
a) Clicking the menu item opens a new browser window.
2.3.8
Menu Item "Visit R&S Website"
When you call this menu item the Rohde&Schwarz home page opens in a separate browser window.
2100.4400.32
- 5.40 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Status of Transmitter: Status Menu
The Status menu provides an overview of faults, warnings and status messages relating to
the individual components and functions of the transmitter.
The status displays can vary depending on the set TV standard.
The Status menu branches to the following menu windows:
– Device Status: Information about the current status of the transmitter (with ATV and
ATSC: also information about the status of the ATV and DTV input interfaces)
– Input Status (DVB only): Information about the configuration and status of the DTV input interfaces
3.1
Status Displays, Warnings and Fault Messages
When warnings and fault messages occur, this usually means that transmission operation
is impaired. Different displays are used to distinguish the severity of an impairment or the
"quality" of a defect. The following applies:
Front panel
Web user
interface
Status display
OK
OK [green] There is no impairment.
Warning
W [yellow]
Although the instrument is functional, it is
possible that external influences are disrupting transmission operation.
Error message
F [red]
A severe fault has occurred; transmission
is usually impossible.
Note
This type of "LED" display using abbreviations (OK, W, F, etc.) and color (web browser only)
is used throughout the entire menu.
3.2
Status > Device Status (with DVB)
2100.4400.32
Display
LED
Description
Sum Fault
Sum fault message: One or more faults occurred
- 5.41 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Display
LED
Description
RF
On
RF level at the exciter output is OK
There is no RF level at the exciter output even though the RF
output is enabled
- OFF -
No RF level at the exciter output since the RF output is not
enabled ("manually" disabled)
On
RF output of the exciter is enabled
Exciter
There are a number of options for enabling the RF output:
– using the setting item RF Output in the RF Out > Output
menu
– on the front panel of the instrument via the RF ON/OFF key
Loop
Input
OK
RF carrier loop closed
- OFF -
RF carrier loop not closed
OK
Valid transport stream present on the active input
In the case of hierarchical coding, the input is OK if valid transport streams are present at both inputs (for HP stream and LP
stream).
Invalid transport stream at the active input (associated with the
setting Type of Loss of Input = Warning, see the section "TV
Settings > Input > Input Automatic")
Invalid transport stream at the active input (associated with the
setting Type of Loss of Input = Fault, see the section "TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic")
FIFO
Overflow or underflow of the input buffer due to incorrectly configured DVB transmission parameters. Possible reasons:
– incorrect data rate of the input data stream
– variations in the input data rate are too great (bursts)
SFN Delay
Desired time of transmission in the SFN cannot be complied with.
Possible reasons:
– the maximum delay set at the MIP inserter is too small for the
(current) transmission link
– incorrect reference signal (GPS)
Reference
OK
External reference frequency present and OK
External reference frequency not OK
External reference frequency is not OK and the fail delay time set
in the TV Settings > Reference > Common menu has expired
- OFF -
External reference frequency not present, but not actually
needed
OK
External 1 PPS source present and the reference frequency is
synchronized with the 1 PPS
PPS
2100.4400.32
- 5.42 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Display
Operating
LED
Description
External 1 PPS source not present or the reference frequency
not synchronized with the 1 PPS
External 1 PPS source is not present or the reference frequency
is not synchronized with the 1 PPS, and the fail delay time set in
the TV Settings > Reference > Common menu has expired
- OFF -
External 1 PPS source not present, but not actually needed
OK
All necessary software options are enabled
A temporary license code for a software option will expire shortly
One or more necessary software options are not enabled
Sum Warning
One or more warnings are active
Self Test
OK
No hardware faults have been detected
Hardware fault has occurred in one or more modules; detailed
information about the fault is recorded in the logbook
OK
Temperature of the modules is OK
At least one module is overheating
OK
Fan is OK
A fan has failed; there is a possibility of overheating
Fan(s) has/have failed; there is an acute risk of overheating
Test Signal
Transmitter has been switched to test mode
Datarate
Wrong data rate on the active input
Option Key
Temperature
Fan
In the case of hierarchical coding, a warning is output if an incorrect data rate is present at one or both inputs.
Mute
RF signal is disabled by the signal processing unit in the exciter
MIP fail
No MIP at the active input. Possible reasons:
– In SFN: no MIP in the input data stream
– In MFN: no MIP in the input data stream and the setting TPS
Source > MIP has been selected in the TV Settings > DVB >
TPS menu window
In the case of hierarchical coding, the LED lights up if both inputs
(for the HP stream and LP stream) are affected.
2100.4400.32
- 5.43 -
E-2
Chapter 5
3.3
Operating
Status > Device Status (with ATV)
Display
LED
Description
Sum Fault
Sum fault message: One or more faults occurred
RF
On
RF level at the exciter output is OK
There is no RF level at the exciter output even though the RF
output is enabled
- OFF -
No RF level at the exciter output since the RF output is not
enabled ("manually" disabled)
On
RF output of the exciter is enabled
Exciter
There are a number of options for enabling the RF output:
– using the setting item RF Output in the RF Out > Output
menu
– on the front panel of the instrument via the RF ON/OFF key
Loop
OK
RF carrier loop closed
- OFF -
RF carrier loop not closed
OK
Valid video signal is present at the input
Invalid video signal at the input
No video signal at the input
OK
All necessary software options are enabled
A temporary license code for a software option will expire shortly
One or more necessary software options are not enabled
Sum Warning
One or more warnings are active
Test Mode
Transmitter has been switched to test mode
HW Error
Hardware fault has occurred in one or more modules; detailed
information about the fault is recorded in the logbook
Temperature
OK
Temperature of the modules is OK
At least one module is overheating
OK
Fan is OK
Video In
Option Key
Fan
2100.4400.32
- 5.44 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Display
Display
Operating
LED
Description
A fan has failed; there is a possibility of overheating
Fan(s) has/have failed; there is an acute risk of overheating
Status
Description
Displays the set audio mode:
Audio Mode
Carrier 1
Carrier 2
2100.4400.32
Mono
Mono
Stereo
Stereo
Dual
Dual sound
Off
Sound carrier 1 is not present in the RF output signal
Mod Off
Modulation for sound carrier 1 has been switched off in the ATV >
Sound > FM Carrier menu
AF1+2
Carrier is modulated with the signals AF1 and AF2
BTSC
Carrier is modulated with BTSC
AF1
Carrier is modulated with the signal AF1
Off
Sound carrier 2 is not present in the RF output signal
Mod Off
Modulation for sound carrier 2 has been switched off in the ATV >
Sound > FM Carrier menu
AF1+2
Carrier is modulated with the signals AF1 and AF2
N/A
Status unknown
N/A
Status unknown
AF1
Carrier is modulated with the signal AF1
AF1-2
Carrier is modulated with the signals AF1 and AF2
AF2
Carrier is modulated with the signal AF2
AF1/P
Carrier is modulated with signal AF1 as well as the pilot tone
AF1-2/P
Carrier is modulated with the signals AF1 and AF2 as well as the
pilot tone
AF2/P
Carrier is modulated with signal AF2 as well as the pilot tone
N:AF1+0
NICAM carrier is modulated with the signal AF1 only
N:AF1+2
NICAM carrier is modulated with the signals AF1 and AF2
N:Digital
Carrier is modulated with a NICAM 728 data stream
N:PRBS
Carrier is modulated with PRBS
- 5.45 -
E-2
Chapter 5
3.4
Operating
Status > Device Status (with ATSC)
Display
LED
Description
Sum Fault
Sum fault message: One or more faults occurred
RF
On
RF level at the exciter output is OK
There is no RF level at the exciter output even though the RF
output is enabled
- OFF -
No RF level at the exciter output since the RF output is not
enabled ("manually" disabled)
On
RF output of the exciter is enabled
Exciter
There are a number of options for enabling the RF output:
– using the setting item RF Output in the RF Out > Output
menu
– on the front panel of the instrument via the RF ON/OFF key
Loop
Input
OK
RF carrier loop closed
- OFF -
RF carrier loop not closed
OK
Valid transport stream present on the active input
In the case of hierarchical coding, the input is OK if valid transport streams are present at both inputs (for HP stream and LP
stream).
Input [1/2] Connect
Option Key
2100.4400.32
Invalid transport stream at the active input (associated with the
setting Type of Loss of Input = Warning, see the section "TV
Settings > Input > Input Automatic")
Invalid transport stream at the active input (associated with the
setting Type of Loss of Input = Fault, see the section "TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic")
OK
Input signal is present at the input TS 1/TS 2
Input signal has not been detected
- OFF -
Input is not present at the input TS 1/TS 2
OK
All necessary software options are enabled
A temporary license code for a software option will expire shortly
- 5.46 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Display
LED
Description
One or more necessary software options are not enabled
OK
External reference frequency present and OK
External reference frequency not OK
External reference frequency is not OK and the fail delay time set
in the TV Settings > Reference > Common menu has expired
- OFF -
External reference frequency not present, but not actually
needed
Sum Warning
One or more warnings are active
Self Test
Hardware fault has occurred in one or more modules; detailed
information about the fault is recorded in the logbook
Temperature
OK
Temperature of the modules is OK
At least one module is overheating
OK
Fan is OK
A fan has failed; there is a possibility of overheating
Fan(s) has/have failed; there is an acute risk of overheating
TS 1 is currently the active input
TS 2 is currently the active input
Datarate
Wrong data rate on the active input
Test Mode
Transmitter has been switched to test mode
Reference
Fan
Active Input
3.5
2100.4400.32
Operating
Status > Input Status (DVB Only)
- 5.47 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Display
LED
Automatic
Ready
Operating
Explanation
Indicates the status of automatic input signal switchover
OK
Automatic switchover is switched on and ready to switch over
from the preselected input to the standby input as soon as a signal fault occurs at the preselected input
- OFF -
Automatic switchover is switched off or not ready because
switchover to the standby input has taken place and automatic
switching back to the operating input is not required (the setting
Automatic Ready After Change Over > OFF is selected in the
menu TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic)
Automatic
changed over
Automatic switchover to the standby input has taken place
HP1 Connect
OK
Input signal is present at TS 1
- OFF -
No input signal present at TS 1
HP1 Seamless
Indicates the status of seamless input switchover for TS 1
(seamless switching)
Seamless switching is activated/deactivated using the Seamless
Switching switch in the TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic
menu window.
HP1 Preselect
HP1 Active
HP1 MIP fail
LP1 Connect
2100.4400.32
On
Operating input and standby input are synchronized
- OFF -
Inputs cannot be synchronized
OK
TS 1 is the preselected operating input
- OFF -
TS 1 is the standby input
OK
TS 1 is currently the active input
- OFF -
TS 1 is currently the inactive input
No MIP at input TS 1. Possible reasons:
– In SFN: no MIP in the input data stream
– In MFN: No MIP in the input data stream and the setting TPS
Source > MIP has been selected in the TV Settings > DVB >
TPS menu window
- OFF -
MIP is present
OK
Input signal is present at TS 2
- OFF -
No input signal present at TS 2
- 5.48 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Display
LED
LP1 Seamless
Operating
Explanation
Indicates the status of seamless input switchover for TS 2
(seamless switching)
Seamless switching is activated/deactivated using the Seamless
Switching switch in the TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic
menu window.
LP1 Preselect
LP1 Active
LP1 MIP fail
2100.4400.32
On
Operating input and standby input are synchronized
- OFF -
Inputs cannot be synchronized
OK
TS 2 is the preselected operating input
- OFF -
TS 2 is the standby input
OK
TS 2 is currently the active input
- OFF -
TS 2 is currently the inactive input
No MIP at input TS 2. Possible reasons:
– In SFN: no MIP in the input data stream
– In MFN: No MIP in the input data stream and the setting TPS
Source > MIP has been selected in the TV Settings > DVB >
TPS menu window
- OFF -
MIP is present
- 5.49 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Event Memory: Logbook Menu
The logbook records state changes (events) affecting the instrument.
Menu windows
The Logbook menu branches to the following menu windows:
– Summary: Complete logbook with all recorded data
– Status: Partial logbook with recorded status changes
– Warning: Partial logbook with recorded occurrences of warnings
– Fault: Partial logbook with recorded occurrences of error messages
4.1
Logbook > Summary/Status/Warning/Fault
The complete logbook and the partial logbooks are uniformly structured. The messages are
numbered sequentially and contain the following information:
– Identification for occurrence or disappearance of an event
– Message: Brief description of the event
– Time: Time of day of the event
– Date: Date of the event
Date and time of an event in the instrument display
1. To display the date and time, select a message and call the info window by pressing OK.
2. Press Back to close the info window and to return to the normal logbook view.
Note
2100.4400.32
The logbooks are sorted according to UTC.
- 5.50 -
E-2
Chapter 5
4.2
Operating
Logbook Context Menu
Additional context functions are available in the menu windows for the complete logbook
and the partial logbooks:
Function
Explanation
Clear logbook
Clears all entries in the current logbook; clearing individual logbook
entries is not possible.
When you clear the complete logbook, the partial logbooks are also
cleared. A Reset Fault is triggered at the same time.
Restore logbook
Restores the cleared entries in the current logbook.
When you restore the complete logbook, the partial logbooks are also
restored.
2100.4400.32
- 5.51 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Input Parameters: TV Settings > Input Menu
The menu windows in the TV Settings > Input menu are used to set the parameters for
signal processing in the ADTV coder.
Menu windows/menu paths
The TV Settings > Input menu branches to the following menu windows and menu paths:
– Input Config (DTV only): Sets signal sources for transport streams 1 and 2 (BNC or Rx
feed= DVB-T/H receiver); sets data format of the transport streams and displays data
format, packet length and data rate; with hierarchical coding the following applies: TS1
= high priority stream, TS2 = low priority stream
– Receiver X or Receiver AUX menu path (DVB-T/H only when the DVB-T/H Receiver
option is the installed receiver module): Receiver module parameterization and status
reporting
– Input Automatic (DTV only): Used to preselect the operating input, configure the automatic input switchover and set the behavior in the event of failure of the input signal
– VF (ATV only): Used to set the video input
– Menu path Sound (ATV only): Used to set audio inputs
5.1
TV Settings > Input > Input Config (DTV only)
Setting item
Description
Source 1
Sets the signal source for transport stream 1
The options are as follows:
– BNC: Transport stream 1 is present on the instrument socket for TS1
– Rx: Transport stream 1 comes from the DVB-T/H receiver
TS Format 1
Sets the data format for the data stream at input TS1
The options are as follows:
– AUTO: Data format is detected automatically
– ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream
– SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream
Source 2
Sets the signal source for transport stream 2
The options are as follows:
– BNC: Transport stream 2 is present on the instrument socket for TS2
– Rx: Transport stream 2 comes from the DVB-T/H receiver
2100.4400.32
- 5.52 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Setting item
Description
TS Format 2
Sets the data format for the data stream at input TS2
Operating
The options are as follows:
– AUTO: Data format is detected automatically
– ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream
– SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream
Display
Description
Active TS Format 1
Displays the data format detected or set at input TS1:
– ASI: as described
– SMTPE: as described
– Auto: Auto is selected and no data stream is present
Packet Length 1
Displays the packet length detected at input TS1
Required Data Rate 1
Display for checking the measured data rate. The maximum data processing rate is displayed.
Displayed in bits per second (bps)
Measured Data Rate
Displays the measureddata rate at input TS1 without null packets
Displayed in bits per second (bps)
Active TS Format 2
Displays the data format detected or set at input TS2:
– ASI: as described
– SMTPE: as described
– Auto: Auto is selected and no data stream is present
Packet Length 2
Displays the packet length detected at input TS2
Required Data Rate 2
Display for checking the measured data rate. The maximum data processing rate is displayed.
Displayed in bits per second (bps)
Measured Data Rate
Displays the measureddata rate at input TS2 without null packets
Displayed in bits per second (bps)
5.1.1
Checking Measured Data Rate
By comparing the displays Measured Data Rate and Required Data Rate, it is possible to
check that the input buffers (FIFOs) are neither overflowing nor underflowing (both cases
would result in transmission interruptions).
Maximum data processing rate in MFN mode
In MFN mode all null packets are first of all removed from the transport stream. The associated useful data rate is measured and displayed under Measured Data Rate. Trouble-
2100.4400.32
- 5.53 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
free operation is possible provided that this measurement value remains below the value
for Required Data Rate.
Note
After the useful data rate has been measured, stuffing to the required data rate is performed, i.e. the difference between Required Data Rate and Measured Data Rate is compensated by inserting null packets.
Required data rate in SFN mode
In SFN mode the incoming transport stream is passed to processing unchanged. The data
rate is measured and displayed under Measured Data Rate. Trouble-free operation is possible provided that this measurement value matches the Required Data Rate (± 1 bps).
5.2
TV Settings > Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX
Submenu (Only DVB-T/-H with Installed DVB-T/-H
Receiver Option)
The menu windows in the TV Settings > Input > Receiver or TV Settings > Input > Receiver AUX menu are used to set the parameters and query the status of an optional receiver module (DVB-T/H Receiver). Separate submenus are available when operating with
two receiver modules.
The menu windows
The Receiver or Receiver AUX menu branches to the following menu windows:
– Setup: For assigning parameters to the receiver module
– TPS: Displays the coding parameters (Code Rate, Guard Interval, FFT Length, etc.) detected by the DVB-T/H receiver
– Status: Displays the measured values (BER, PER, SNR, etc.) determined by the DVBT/H receiver
5.2.1
2100.4400.32
TV Settings > Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX > Setup
- 5.54 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Setting item
Description
Enable Hierarchy
Prepares receiver module for hierarchical coding mode
Operating
Two receiver modules are needed for the Retransmitter function with
hierarchy. Module 1 analyzes the HP component in the RF input signal
and transfers the associated high priority stream to the exciter. Module 2
(auxiliary) analyzes the LP component and delivers the low priority
stream for the exciter.
RF Frequency
Center frequency of the DVB-T/H signal fed to the antenna input of the
receiver module.
Bandwidth
Channel bandwidth (6, 7 or 8 MHz)
RF Attenuation
Antenna
Manual input attenuation (0 dB to 31 dB)
This value should be adapted to suit the expected input level.
5.2.2
BER Threshold
Fault threshold for the bit error ratio (measured after the Viterbi decoder)
PER Threshold
Fault threshold for the packet error ratio
Display
Description
Rx OK
Status reporting for the DVB-TH receiver:
– W: Warning, receiver has no valid input signal
– OK: Receiver has a valid input signal
TV Settings > Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX > TPS
If the receiver in the TV Settings > Input > Receiver (or Receiver AUX) > Setup menu
displays OK in the Rx OK field, the DVB-T/H parameters it has determined are listed and
valid at this point.
5.2.3
TV Settings > Input > Receiver / Receiver AUX > Status
This menu displays the measured values of the associated receiver module.
2100.4400.32
- 5.55 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Display
Description
Synchronized
Shows whether the DVB-T/H receiver was able to synchronize with the
incoming DVB-T/H signal.
Estimated S/N
Estimated (!) signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver input
The maximum display comes to around 24 dB, even if the actual value is
higher.
5.3
BER before Viterbi
Bit error ratio before the Viterbi decoder
BER after Viterbi
Bit error ratio after the Viterbi decoder
PER
Packet error ratio
IF AGC Input
Status information about the receiver module's automatic gain control.
RF Input Level
RF input level in dBV
Gain Input
Status information about the receiver module's automatic gain control.
TV Settings > Input > Input Automatic (DTV Only)
Setting item
Description
Preselect Input
For preselecting the active input
– INPUT 1: Operating input is TS 1.
– INPUT 2: Operating input is TS 2.
Autoswitch
Activates and deactivates automatic input switchover
In the event of a failure on the active operating input, the automatic system switches the input signal over automatically to the standby input.
The automatic switchover mode is defined by the following parameter
settings.
2100.4400.32
- 5.56 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Setting item
Description
Seamless Switching
(DVB only)
Switches seamless input switchover on or off
– ON: In the event of a failure, input switchover takes place without a
break in transmission, provided that the data streams are synchronized at the operating and standby inputs.
– OFF: The Seaml. Switching function can be deactivated to allow the
automatic input switchover to be tested.
The function has no effect when automatic input switchover is deactivated.
Priority
– EQUAL: The preselected operating input and standby input have the
same priority. Once a switchover has taken place the system does not
normally switch back to the previously faulty operating input.
– PRIO: The preselected operating input is the priority input. Once a
switchover has taken place the system switches back to the preselected operating input as soon as the signal reappears.
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active.
Automatic Ready
After Change Over
Sets the behavior after switchover to the standby input
– ON: The automatic input signal system stays active after every
switchover and can return to the formerly perturbed input.
– OFF: Switches over to the standby input once. The automatic system
must be reset to "ready" manually by pressing the Reset Fault key.
The preselected operating input then becomes active again.
Check Time Forward
For setting a delay time (0 to 60 s) which must elapse before the
switchover to the standby input takes place in the event of a failure on
the operating input
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active.
Check Time Back
For setting a delay time (0 to 60 s) which must elapse before switching
back to the preselected operating input after switching over from the
standby input (which is no longer active)
The function has no effect when seamless switching is active and/or the
priority mode is set to EQUAL.
2100.4400.32
On Loss Of Input
For setting the behavior in the event of a defective input signal (synchronization error)
– No Mute: The output signal is not suppressed (only effective with
MFN)
– Mute: The output signal is suppressed if the data rate is incorrect (this
feature always applies to SFN)
Type Of Loss Of Input
Selection:
– Warning: If the input signal fails, only a warning will be generated.
– Fault: If the input signal fails, an additional sum fault will be generated
after the time set under Fail Delay Time has elapsed. In the case of
transmitter standby, switchover to the second transmitter takes place.
Fail Delay Time
For setting a delay time which must elapse after an input signal dropout
before a sum fault is generated.
- 5.57 -
E-2
Chapter 5
5.3.1
Operating
Automatic Input Switchover
The transmitter has an automatic switchover function which, in the event of a signal failure,
switches the transmitter from one input to the other input (provided that a valid input signal
is available at the standby input). Before a failure occurs, the preselected input is active.
The way in which this automatic switchover function operates is determined by the following
factors:
– Automatic switchover: ON or OFF (Autoswitch)
– Delay times which must elapse before the switchover is performed (Check Time Forward and Check Time Back)
– Priority mode: Inputs have the same priority or the preselected inputs have priority (Priority)
– Operating and standby inputs synchronized or not synchronized (in conjunction with
Seamless Switching)
Note
Automatic input switchover is not available with hierarchical coding.
Automatic input switchover ON/OFF
If automatic switchover is OFF, the preselected input remains active even if the input signal
fails.
If automatic switchover is ON and there is a failure at the preselected input, switchover to
the associated standby input takes place.
Priority mode PRIO (input priority)
Following a switchover of the preselected input, the automatic system switches back to this
priority input as soon as a signal reappears. Switchover is delayed for the set delay times.
If the signal fails at both the operating input and the standby input, the priority input remains
active.
Note
By setting the Automatic Ready After Change Over switch position to OFF you can prevent an "automatic" return to the dominant input when the signal comes back. The switchover to the dominant input then only takes place when you press the Reset Fault key.
Priority mode EQUAL (equal input priority)
Following a switchover of the preselected input, the standby input with the same priority remains active until the input signal fails on this input also. The automatic system switches
back to the preselected input, but only if a signal is present on it once again. Switchover is
delayed for the set delay times.
Note
2100.4400.32
Selecting this operating mode keeps to a minimum the number of switchover operations
and in certain cases the number of breaks in transmission (in the case of unsynchronized
input streams).
- 5.58 -
E-2
Chapter 5
5.3.2
Operating
Behavior with Defective Input Signal
The behavior in the event of a defective input signal can be influenced using the On Loss
Of Input switch:
– Mute: The output signal of the transmitter is suppressed as soon as synchronization with
the input signal (from the operating input and standby input) is no longer possible.
– No Mute: The output signal of the transmitter is not suppressed even though the input
signal is defective. However, when this happens only null packets are transmitted.
5.4
5.4.1
TV Settings > Input > VF (ATV Only)
Setting item
Explanation
Nominal Input Amplitude (Vpp)
Used to select the nominal input amplitude, either 0.7 Vpp or 1 Vpp for
75 in each case
Display
Explanation
Clipping
Indicates the status of input signal clipping; the indications are as follows:
– No status display: Input signal is within the valid range (NO CLIPPING)
– Yellow: Input signal is just off a limit boundary (NO HEADROOM)
– Red: Input signal is limited (CLIPPING)
Input Amplitude
Nominal input amplitude
At the nominal input amplitude, a nominal signal with 30% S and 70% noncomposite components is assumed. All of the percent indications which follow with reference to the amplitude relate to the selected input amplitude and a nominal signal.
2100.4400.32
- 5.59 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Permissible input amplitude
The maximum permissible deviation of the input amplitude from the nominal amplitude is
equal to ±50%. A smaller input amplitude can result in no vision signal being detected or
the quality data not being complied with.
For a larger input amplitude, the input signal can be clipped during analog/digital conversion. This will cause signal components to be lost. Clipping of the input signal is indicated
using the Clipping status indicator.
In addition, the input signal may have superimposed on it an interference signal with frequencies up to 300 Hz and a peak voltage of a maximum of 30% of the input amplitude as
well as white noise that is band-limited to 6 MHz with a maximum level of –26 dBm.
Current input amplitude
The current input amplitude is measured in a selected scanning line in which the white pulse
is located. The measured values for the current sync pulse amplitude and the white pulse
amplitude can be displayed.
– Selecting the scanning line: see "TV Settings > ATV > Vision > White Control"
– Displaying the measurement values: see "TV Settings > ATV > Vision > Sync Pulse"
5.5
TV Settings > Input > Sound Menu (ATV Only)
The menu windows in the TV Settings > Input > Sound menu are used to set the parameters for audio signal processing in the ADTV coder according to the respective standard.
Menu windows
The TV Settings > Input > Sound menu branches to the following menu windows:
– Input B|G, D|K, I, M1: Used to set the nominal input levels for the AF signals and to adjust the pre-emphasis and low-pass filter
– Input M, N: Used to set the nominal input levels for the AF signals and to adjust the preemphasis and low-pass filter
– Input M, N BTSC: Used to set the nominal input level for the BTSC signal
– Input NICAM Mod: Used to set the nominal input levels for the AF signals and to adjust
the pre-emphasis and low-pass filter
– Input NICAM Cod: Used to set the nominal input levels for the AF signals and to adjust
the pre-emphasis (FM and NICAM) and the low-pass filter (FM)
2100.4400.32
- 5.60 -
E-2
Chapter 5
5.5.1
Operating
Input Level at Analog Audio Coder
Nominal input level
The nominal input level determines the level of a sinusoidal signal with a frequency of
500 Hz for which the set nominal deviation (see the "FM deviation" section) will occur with
the preemphasis switched off.
Permissible input level
The AF inputs may be overdriven by a maximum of +4 dB starting over the nominal input
level. In case of higher input levels, the input signal will be clipped by the A/D converter.
This will cause certain signal components to be lost.
This clipping helps to avoid overdriving the following units. The threshold is set so that no
clipping occurs during normal operation.
5.5.2
Input Level at NICAM Coder
Nominal input level
The nominal input level is determined for a 2 kHz sinewave signal with 0 dBm in accordance
with the NICAM specification.
In the case of input levels deviating from the nominal input level, an appropriate gain or loss
(negative values) can be set for signals AF1 and AF2 under Gain Adjustment NICAM.
Permissible input level
If the input levels are set as described under "Nominal input level", the drive reserves defined in the NICAM specification will be available.
If the drive reserves are exceeded, the input signal will be clipped by the A/D converter. This
will cause certain signal components to be lost. This is indicated by the Input Clipping
NICAM status displays for inputs AF1 and AF2.
5.5.3
2100.4400.32
TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input B|G, D|K, I, M1
- 5.61 -
E-2
Chapter 5
5.5.4
2100.4400.32
Operating
Setting item
Explanation
Nominal Level
[AF1 / AF2]
Used to set the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2
Preemphasis
Used to switch the pre-emphasis required by the respective TV standard
(50 s or 75 s) on or off for FM sound
Lowpass
Used to switch a low-pass filter on or off for FM sound
Display
Explanation
Current Input Level
[AF1 / AF2]
Indicates the current input level at the FM sound modulator for the AF
signal AF1 and AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level
Input Clipping
[AF1 / AF2]
If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 exceeds the maximum permissible input
level, the amplitude is limited. This is signaled by the Input Clipping status display.
TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input M, N
Setting item
Explanation
Nominal Level
[AF1]
Used to set the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1
Preemphasis
Used to switch the pre-emphasis required by the respective TV standard
(50 s or 75 s) on or off for FM sound
Lowpass
Used to switch a low-pass filter on or off for FM sound
Display
Explanation
Current Input Level
[AF1]
Indicates the current input level at the FM sound modulator for the AF
signal AF1 as a percentage of the maximum drive level
Input Clipping
[AF1]
If the AF signal AF1 exceeds the maximum permissible input level, the
amplitude is limited. This is signaled by the Input Clipping status display.
- 5.62 -
E-2
Chapter 5
5.5.5
5.5.6
2100.4400.32
Operating
TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input M, N BTSC
Setting item
Explanation
Nominal Level
[BTSC]
Used to set the nominal input level for the BTSC signal
Display
Explanation
Current Input Level
[BTSC]
Indicates the current input level at the FM sound modulator for the
BTSC signal as a percentage of the maximum drive level
Input Clipping
[BTSC]
If the BTSC signal exceeds the maximum permissible input level, the
amplitude is limited. This is signaled by the Input Clipping status display.
TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input NICAM Mod
Setting item
Explanation
Nominal Level
[AF1 / AF2]
Used to set the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2
Preemphasis
Used to switch the pre-emphasis required by the respective TV standard
(50 s or 75 s) on or off for FM sound
Lowpass
Used to switch a low-pass filter on or off for FM sound
Display
Explanation
Current Input Level
[AF1 / AF2]
Indicates the current input level at the FM sound modulator for the AF
signal AF1 and AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level
- 5.63 -
E-2
Chapter 5
5.5.7
2100.4400.32
Operating
Display
Explanation
Input Clipping
[AF1 / AF2]
If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 exceeds the maximum permissible input
level, the amplitude is limited. This is signaled by the Input Clipping status display.
NICAM 728 Datastream
Indicates that a NICAM 728 data stream is present
TV Settings > Input > Sound > Input NICAM Cod
Setting item
Explanation
Nominal Level FM/
NICAM [AF1 / AF2]
Used to set the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2
Gain Adjustment
NICAM [AF1 / AF2]
Used to adapt the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2
which is fed to the integrated NICAM coder
Preemphasis [FM]
Used to switch the pre-emphasis required by the respective TV standard
(50 s or 75 s) on or off for FM sound
Preemphasis
[NICAM]
Used to switch the pre-emphasis required by the TV standard on or off
for NICAM sound
Lowpass [FM]
Used to switch a low-pass filter on or off for FM sound
Display
Explanation
Current Input Level
FM [AF1 / AF2]
Indicates the current input level at the FM sound modulator for the AF
signal AF1 and AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level
Current Input Level
NICAM [AF1 / AF2]
Indicates the current input level at the NICAM coder for the AF signal
AF1 and AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level
Input Clipping FM
[AF1/AF2]
If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 exceeds the maximum permissible input
level, the amplitude is limited. This is signaled by the Input Clipping status display.
Input Clipping NICAM
[AF1 / AF2]
If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 is amplified beyond the permissible input
level at the NICAM coder, the amplitude is limited. This is signaled by
the Input Clipping NICAM status display.
- 5.64 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
RF Generation: TV Settings > RF Out Menu
The menu windows in the TV Settings > RF Out menu are used to enter settings for output
power, frequency generation, modulation and RF monitoring.
Menu windows
The TV Settings > RF Out menu branches to the following menu windows:
– Amplifier: Used to set and display the output power and to display faults and warnings
– Synthesizer: Used to set the channel frequency
– Output: Used to enable the RF output, precorrect the amplitude-frequency response of
downstream components; with ATV: used to set the sound carrier level and to adjust the
residual carrier
– IQ Adjust: Used to adjust the modulator
– Precorrection: Used to switch the entire linear and nonlinear precorrection on or off
6.1
TV Settings > RF Out > Amplifier
The Amplifier menu window is used to adjust and display the power output and to signal a
low output power.
Setting item
Description
Output Power a)
Used to set the required output power of the transmitter
(the output power should not exceed the specified nominal power)
RF Fail Limit
Used to set a threshold value in dB for low RF output power. The threshold is referenced to the power output set under Output Power.
If the power drops below the set threshold value, an RF Fail fault is generated.
Default setting: -3 dB
RF Warning Limit
Used to set a threshold value in dB for low RF output power. The threshold is referenced to the power output set under Output Power.
If the power drops below the set threshold value, an RF Warning is generated.
Default setting: -1 dB
2100.4400.32
- 5.65 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
a) When the time scheduler is enabled, the appropriate setting from the Time Scheduler Configuration menu
has priority.
Display
Symbol
Description
Actual Power
Status
OK
Power display is valid
Power display is invalid
The internal power meter of an amplifier is overloaded; the actual
output power may be above the displayed power.
RF Fail
Amplifier
6.2
- OFF -
RF power at the output of the output stage OK or transmitter
switched off
RF power is below the threshold specified under RF Fail Limit
OK
No warning at the output stage
Output stage signals a sum warning
Display
Description
Actual Power
Present forward power of the transmitter
TV Settings > RF Out > Synthesizer
Setting item
Description
Frequency a)
Used to set the transmission frequency
Frequency Offset
If a frequency offset exists, it is added directly to the transmission frequency (DVB only)
The frequency offset transferred in the MIP is addressed to a specific
transmitter in the network and is only evaluated if the Tx address set in
the TV Settings > DVB > Common menu window identifies the correct
receiver. Additionally, to allow display and activation, Tx Automatic must
be activated under TV Settings > DVB > Common.
a) When the time scheduler is enabled, the appropriate setting from the Time Scheduler Configuration menu
has priority.
2100.4400.32
- 5.66 -
E-2
Chapter 5
6.3
6.4
Operating
TV Settings > RF Out > Output
Setting item
Explanation
RF Output
Enables (On) or disables (Off) the RF output
RF Slope
Used to correct asymmetry of the amplitude-frequency response in the
spectrum in order to precorrect the output stage and filter
Modulation Slope
Used to correct curvature of the amplitude-frequency response in the
spectrum in order to precorrect the output stage and filter
Vision/Sound
Carrier 1
Used to set sound carrier level 1 referenced to the peak envelope power
of the vision carrier (Analog TV only)
Vision/Sound
Carrier 2
Used to set sound carrier level 2 referenced to the peak envelope power
of the vision carrier (Analog TV only)
Residual Carrier
Used to set the residual carrier in percent
TV Settings > RF Out > IQ Adjust
When the transmitter is delivered, the I/Q modulator is factory-adjusted so that no customer
intervention is normally required. If further I/Q adjustment is needed at a later time, the RF
OUT > IQ Adjust menu window provides the associated setting options.
Note
The chapter "Maintenance" describes how to perform I/Q adjustment.
Setting item/
Display
I/Q Testsignal
2100.4400.32
Description
For switching a test signal on or off so that I/Q adjustment can be carried
out manually
- 5.67 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Setting item/
Display
6.5
Operating
Description
Bias Coarse [I/Q]
Coarse adjustment and display of an actuator for suppressing the
unwanted center carrier
Bias Fine [I/Q]
Fine adjustment and display of an actuator for suppressing the
unwanted center carrier
Gain [I/Q]
For setting and displaying an actuator for suppressing the unwanted
carrier in the sideband
Phase
For setting and displaying an actuator for suppressing the unwanted
carrier in the sideband
TV Settings > RF Out > Precorrection
Setting item
Description
Linear Correction
For switching the entire linear precorrection on or off
Nonlinear Correction
For switching the entire nonlinear precorrection on or off
Restore Current Setting
Restores the factory set precorrection for the currently set power/frequency
Restore All Settings
Restores complete factory set precorrections for every power/frequency
Display
Description
User Precorrection
State
Status of the user set precorrection
– Inactive: No matching precorrection data stored in the instrument a)
– Active: Normal status; database used
– Warning a):
The present precorrection has been carried out using the same amplifier type, but the serial number stored in the database does not
match.
– Fault a):
The present precorrection has been carried out using a completely
different instrument and therefore cannot be used.
Factory Precorrection State
Status of the factory set precorrection
Same displays as for User Precorrection State
2100.4400.32
- 5.68 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
a) The status should always be "Active". In every other case the CF card has been tampered with or the factory
set precorrection data has been deleted. In the latter case the instrument must be returned to
Rohde&Schwarz Service so that the factory set precorrection data can be reentered.
2100.4400.32
- 5.69 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
DVB Settings: TV Settings > DVB Menu
The menu windows in the TV Settings > DVB menu are used to (pre)set the DVB transmission parameters required for coding and modulation and to check the used (TPS) settings (TPS = Transmission Parameter Signaling) which are signaled during transmission.
Note
Providing there is a MIP (Megaframe Initialization Packet) in the transport stream, TPS information can also be read out and used for configuring the DVB transmission parameters.
In this case the signaled parameters may not be the same as the manually preset parameters.
Menu windows
The TV Settings > DVB menu branches to the following menu windows and menu paths:
– Common: Used to select the digital TV standard, the network operating mode and the
TPS source, to switch Tx Automatic on and off, to signal the cell ID in the TPS, and to
set the Tx address
– TPS: Used to select the TPS source, to enter (pre)settings manually; displays the active
TPS parameters
– SFN Delay: For displaying and setting signal delay times in the SFN
– Test Signals: Used to configure DVB transmission parameters for test mode
7.1
TV Settings > DVB > Common
Setting item
Explanation
Digital Standard
Used to select the digital TV standard: DVB-T or DVB-H
Network Mode
Used to select the network operating mode: SFN or MFN
TPS Source
Used to set the source for the TPS parameters: MIP or manual presets
The TPS source can also be set in the TV Settings > DVB > TPS menu
window.
Cell ID Enable
Used to switch cell ID signaling on or off in the TPS
The cell ID itself is set in the TV Settings > DVB > TPS menu window. It
can also be retrieved from the MIP.
The Cell ID can only be retrieved from the MIP if Tx Automatic is activated and the Tx address is correctly set.
2100.4400.32
- 5.70 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Setting item
Explanation
Tx Address
Used to set the transmitter address; address range: 0 to 65535
Setting the transmitter address is a precondition to reading Tx information (transmitter-specific settings) from the MIP. However, the information is only used if Tx Automatic is enabled.
Tx Automatic
Used to switch Tx Automatic on or off
If Tx Automatic is activated (and the transmitter address is set), the following Tx parameters are retrieved from the MIP:
Time Offset, Frequency Offset and Cell ID
7.2
Display
Explanation
Amplifier Control
Indicates the status of amplifier control
TV Settings > DVB > TPS
Selection of TPS source
The TPS Source switch is used to select the source for the TPS parameters:
– MIP: The TPS information is to be retrieved from the MIP
– Manual Presets: The TPS parameters are to be configured manually
Note
If the system is in MFN mode and the MIP drops out when MIP has been selected as the
TPS source, the system continues transmission using the last known MIP values.
Configuration of TPS parameters
TPS parameters classified as Manual can be configured. These manual settings become
active if Manual Presets is selected as the TPS source.
If MIP is selected as the TPS source, the TPS information is retrieved from the MIP. If the
MIP fails, the system attempts to continue transmission using the last known configuration.
If the instrument is restarted, at least one MIP packet must be received for the configuration
to be known.
2100.4400.32
- 5.71 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Displaying active TPS parameters
Active identifies the active (and indicated) TPS parameters. There are also two displays for
the required data rates at one or two active inputs (see the section "Checking Measured
Data Rate").
If the TPS information from the MIP is used, the values displayed under Active may not be
the same as the manual settings (Manual).
Overview of parameters
Setting item
Explanation
TPS Source
Used to set the source for the TPS parameters: MIP or manual presets
Display/
setting item
Explanation of
active or manually set TPS parameters
Bandwidth
Signal bandwidth
Display/setting: 5, 6, 7 or 8 MHz
FFT Length
IFFT length
Display/setting: 2k or 8k; also 4k for DVB-H
Guard Interval
Guard interval
Display/setting: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16 or 1/32
Constellation
Modulation mode
Display/setting: QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM
With hierarchical coding, the value refers to the sum of constellation
points from HP and LP Stream; possible values are therefore: 16QAM or
64QAM
Alpha
Hierarchical parameter
Display/setting:
– No Hier: no hierarchical coding
– 1 H: hierarchical coding with = 1
– 2 H: hierarchical coding with = 2
– 3 H: hierarchical coding with = 3
1 H, 2 H or 3 H activates the hierarchical coding mode. However, this is
only possible if Constellation is set to 16QAM or 64QAM.
Cell ID
Cell ID
Display/setting: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The cell ID can only be retrieved from the MIP if Tx Automatic is activated and the Tx address is correctly set in the TV Settings > DVB >
Common menu.
For the purpose of signaling in the output signal (TPS), the Cell ID
Enable parameter must also be activated in the TV Settings > DVB >
Common menu.
2100.4400.32
- 5.72 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Display/
setting item
Explanation of
active or manually set TPS parameters
Interleaver
Interleaver
Operating
Display/setting:
– nat: Default setting ("native") with standard function for DVB-T
– in depth: 8k interleaving for DVB-H with IFFT lengths of 2k and 4k to
improve transmission reliability (DVB-H parameter)
7.3
Code Rate [HP/LP]
Internal code rate (separate for HP and LP stream)
Display/setting: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 6/7
Time Slicing [HP/LP]
Time slicing flag (DVB-H parameter)
Display/setting separate for HP and LP stream:
– OFF: Default setting; no signaling via flag
– ON: A flag is set in the broadcast DVB signal. This flag informs the
receiver that at least one service in the DVB-H data stream uses time
slicing.
MPE FEC [HP/LP]
MPE FEC flag (DVB-H parameter)
Display/setting separate for HP and LP stream:
– OFF: Default setting; no signaling via flag
– ON: This flag informs the receiver that at least one service in the
DVB-H data stream uses the forward error correction for MPE (Multi
Protocol Encapsulation).
Req. Data Rate
[HP/LP]
Displays the data rate required at the input for the currently active TPS
settings (see the TV Settings > Input > TS1(HP) menu and the TV Settings > Input > TS2(LP) menu)
TV Settings > DVB > SFN Delay
All transmitters in a single-frequency network (SFN) must transmit the same information at
the same time and at the same frequency (single-frequency condition). A number of delay
times occur prior to transmission at the antenna, defining the individual time of transmission
at the transmitter station.
The SFN Delay menu window can be used to check the individual delay times. This makes
it possible to check whether the single-frequency condition is met.
2100.4400.32
Display
Explanation
Maximum Delay
Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (MIP inserter)
to the transmitter antenna for regular transmission. This delay is set in
the MIP inserter and is the default for all transmitters of the SFN.
- 5.73 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Display
Explanation
Network Delay
Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (MIP inserter)
to the input of the exciter. This delay depends on the used transmission
path.
Processing Delay
Minimum turnaround time of the signal by the exciter. This delay
depends on the DVB transmission parameters.
Dynamic Delay
Time by which signal processing is delayed artificially in order to achieve
the required time of transmission.
Total Delay
Actual turnaround time of the signal by the exciter. This time is the sum
of Processing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
Tx Offset Delay
Positive or negative offset (transferred in the MIP for the individual transmitter location) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of
transmission preset under Maximum Delay.
This delay is only displayed and activated if Tx Automatic has been activated and the Tx address of the transmitter is correct.
If Tx Offset Delay and Static Delay are present at the same time, their
effects are added together.
Setting item
Explanation
Static Delay
Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter
location) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission preset under Maximum Delay. The Static Delay is used to compensate differences between transmission systems from different
manufacturers.
If Static Delay and Tx Offset Delay are present at the same time, their
effect is added together.
Max Deviation Time
2100.4400.32
Maximum deviation in the calculated time of transmission which can be
corrected without interrupting transmission.
Default setting: 10 s
- 5.74 -
E-2
Chapter 5
7.3.1
Operating
Distribution of Delays on Timeline
Play-out
Center
Transmitter
Antenna
Maximum Delay
Network Delay
Dynamic Delay
Processing Delay
Total Delay
ΔT
= Static Delay
+ Tx Offset Delay
<0
>0
timeline
SFN
Tx
TS x IN
MIP Inserter
Fig. 15 Delays in SFN
1) Timeline showing the defined times for signal insertion (MIP Inserter), signal feed to the exciter (TS x IN), time
of transmission at the station (Tx) and regular time of transmission (SFN)
2) T = Difference between the individual time of transmission of the station and the regular time of transmission
in the SFN; with negative sign in the example
Using the information in the MIP and the measured signal processing time, the microcontroller calculates the dynamic delay for the planned time of transmission.
Note
In order to comply with the single-frequency condition, the value of the dynamic delay must
be between 0 and 1 second.
7.4
TV Settings > DVB > Monitor / Monitor AUX Submenu
(Only DVB-T/-H with Installed DVB-T/-H Monitor
Option)
The menu windows in the menu TV Settings > DVB > Monitor and TV Settings > DVB >
Monitor AUX are used to parameterize an optional monitor module and to query its status
(DVB-T/-H monitor option). Separate submenus are available in the case of operation with
two monitor modules.
Menu windows
The Monitor and Monitor AUX menus branch to the following menu windows:
2100.4400.32
- 5.75 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
– Setup: Used to parameterize the monitor module
– TPS: Displays the coding parameters detected by the DVB-T/-H monitor (code rate,
guard interval, FFT length, ...)
– Status: Displays the measurement values determined by the DVB-T/-H monitor (BER,
PER, SNR, ...)
7.4.1
TV Settings > DVB > Monitor / Monitor AUX > Setup
Setting item
Explanation
Input
Used to select the signal to be monitored
The options are as follows:
– Antenna: Signal at the input socket of the monitor module is monitored
– Amplifier: Internally tapped signal at the output of the amplifier is monitored
Frequency
Used to set the frequency; displays the frequency according to the position of the Input switch:
– Antenna: Entry of the center frequency of the DVB-T/-H signal fed to
the monitor module from an external source
– Amplifier: Automatic display of the current transmit frequency of the
amplifier
Bandwidth
Channel bandwidth (6, 7 or 8 MHz)
RF Attenuation
Antenna
Manual input attenuation (0 dB to 31 dB)
This value should be adapted to the input level to be expected.
2100.4400.32
BER Threshold
Fault threshold for the bit error rate (measured downstream of the Viterbi decoder)
PER Threshold
Fault threshold for the packet error rate
Display
Explanation
Rx OK
Indicates the status of the DVB-T/-H monitor:
– W: Warning; the monitor module is not receiving a valid input signal
– OK: Monitor module is receiving a valid input signal
- 5.76 -
E-2
Chapter 5
7.4.2
Operating
TV Settings > DVB > Monitor / Monitor AUX > TPS
If the monitor module displays OK in the Rx OK field in the menu TV Settings > DVB >
Monitor (or Monitor AUX) > Setup, the DVB-T/-H parameters that the monitor module has
determined are listed here and are valid.
7.4.3
TV Settings > DVB > Monitor / Monitor AUX > Status
This menu displays the measured values of the associated receiver module.
Display
Explanation
Synchronized
Indicates whether the DVB-T/-H monitor was able to synchronize to the
received DVB-T/-H signal
Estimated S/N
Estimated (!) signal/noise ratio at the input of the monitor module
The maximum displayed value is approx. 24 dB, even if the actual value
is better.
2100.4400.32
BER before Viterbi
Bit error rate upstream of the Viterbi decoder
BER after Viterbi
Bit error rate downstream of the Viterbi decoder
PER
Packet error rate
IF AGC Input
Information about the status of the automatic gain control of the monitor
module
RF Input Level
RF input level in dBV
Gain Input
Information about the status of the automatic gain control of the monitor
module
- 5.77 -
E-2
Chapter 5
7.5
Operating
TV Settings > DVB > Test Signals
The Test Signals menu window is used to generate test signals.
Setting item
Description
PRBS Insertion
Insertion of a PRBS sequence instead of the transport stream present at
the input
Selection:
– OFF: Normal operating status, test sequence not active
– 2^23-1, 2^15-1 or 2^9-1: Displayed PRBS sequence selected
Test Signal Insertion
Insertion of unmodulated test carriers or suppression of modulated carrier ranges in the output frequency spectrum
Selection:
– OFF: Normal operating status, test signal not active
– CARRIER 1: Insertion of an unmodulated test carrier at carrier
position 1
– CARRIER 2: Insertion of an unmodulated test carrier at carrier
position 2
– C1 and C2: Insertion of two unmodulated test carriers at carrier
position 1 and carrier position 2
– BANDPASS: Suppression of the modulated carriers from position 0 to
carrier position 1 and from carrier position 2 to the end of the frequency spectrum
– BANDSTOP: Suppression of the modulated carriers in the range
between carrier position 1 and carrier position 2
In the BANDPASS and BANDSTOP functions, the value for carrier 1
must be smaller than the value for carrier 2.
2100.4400.32
Carrier 1
Sets the position for test carrier 1
Carrier 2
Sets the position for test carrier 2
- 5.78 -
E-2
Chapter 5
7.5.1
Operating
Arrangement of Test Signals in Output Frequency Spectrum
Channel Bandwidth
used Bandwidth
2k
4k
1704
3408
8k
3408
6816
C1
852
C2
1704
Fig. 16 Test Signal Insertion function | C1 and C2
Channel Bandwidth
used Bandwidth
2k
4k
1704
3408
8k
3408
6816
C1
852
C2
1704
Fig. 17 Test Signal Insertion function | Bandpass
Channel Bandwidth
used Bandwidth
2k
4k
1704
3408
8k
3408
6816
C1
852
C2
1704
Fig. 18 Test Signal Insertion function | Bandstop
2100.4400.32
- 5.79 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
ATSC Settings: TV Settings > ATSC Menu
The menu windows in the TV Settings > ATSC menu can be used to configure up to two
input channels.
Menu windows
The TV Settings > ATSC menu branches to the following menu windows:
– Common: Status display for amplifier control
– Input Config: Used to configure the input data streams; displays the data format, packet
length and data rate
8.1
2100.4400.32
TV Settings > ATSC > Common
Display
Explanation
Amplifier Control
Status display for amplifier control
- 5.80 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
ATV Settings: TV Settings > ATV Menu
The menu windows in the TV Settings > ATV menu are used to enter settings for the ADTV
coder with analog TV.
Menu windows/menu paths
The TV Settings > ATV menu branches to the following menu windows and menu paths:
– Common: Used to enter basic settings for signal processing
– Vision menu path: Used to set parameters for video signal processing in the ADTV coder
– Sound menu path: Used to set parameters for audio signal processing in the ADTV coder
9.1
2100.4400.32
TV Settings > ATV > Common
Setting item
Explanation
TV Standard
Used to select the ATV standard
IRT-NICAM
Setting: IRT or NICAM (for standards B|G, D|K, I, I1)
– IRT: Second sound subcarrier is frequency-modulated
– NICAM: Second sound subcarrier is modulated according to the
NICAM specification
NICAM Mode
Used to select the NICAM mode (for standards B|G, D|K, I, I1):
– Coder: AF signal feed of AF1 and AF2 via the inputs AUDIO 1 and
AUDIO 2 as well as coding and modulation in the transmitter
– Modulator: Signal feed as NICAM 728 data stream via the digital input
NICAM DATA
NICAM Rolloff
Used to set the NICAM rolloff (for standards B|G, D|K, I, I1):
– Auto: NICAM rolloff is automatically set according to the selected TV
standard and in compliance with the NICAM specifications (recommended setting !)
– 40% / 100%: Manual setting of the NICAM rolloff
Sound Select
Used to select the number of sound subcarriers (for standards B|G, D|K,
I, I1, M1):
– Single Carrier: One sound subcarrier
– Dual Carrier: Two sound subcarriers
- 5.81 -
E-2
Chapter 5
9.2
Setting item
Explanation
FM Input
Setting: AF 1 or BTSC (for standards M, N)
– AF 1: MONO audio mode, signal feed via input AUDIO 1
– BTSC: BTSC audio mode, signal feed via input BTSC
Operating
TV Settings > ATV > Vision Menu
The menu windows in the TV Settings > ATV > Vision menu are used to set the parameters for video signal processing.
Menu windows
The TV Settings > ATV > Vision menu branches to the following menu windows:
– White Control: Used to switch on and adjust white control
– White Limiter: Used to switch on and adjust the white limiter
– Sync Pulse: Used to switch on and adjust sync-pulse regeneration
– Equalizer: Used to switch individual equalizer paths on or off
9.2.1
2100.4400.32
TV Settings > ATV > Vision > White Control
Setting item
Description
Automatic
Switches white control on or off.
Testline
Selects the test line for the white pulse.
The test line can be in the first or second field.
Gain Source
Selection of the source for fixed video gain in case offailure of the white
pulse with white control simultaneously switched on.
The options are as follows:
– MANUAL: For the gain, the manual settings under Manual Gain apply.
– MEMORY: The gain uses the most recently saved value for white
control.
Manual Gain
Manual setting of the video gain
The value which is set is the gain of the actuator as a percentage
referred to gain 1.
- 5.82 -
E-2
Chapter 5
9.2.2
2100.4400.32
Operating
Display
Description
Memory Gain
Display of the last value saved by the white control which can be used
for fixed video gain.
The value which is displayed is the gain of the actuator as a percentage
referred to gain 1.
Current Gain Source
Display of the active source for the video gain:
– Manual: Manual setting (see Gain Source)
– Memory: Memory for the white control (see Gain Source)
– Automatic: White control
White Amplitude
Input
Measured value for the white amplitude input
White Amplitude Output
Measured value for the white amplitude output
White Pulse Monitoring
Status display for the white pulse monitoring:
– NONE: The test line with the white pulse was not found
– OK: White pulse found and level OK
– < -40% / < -30% / > +30% / > +40%: The level of the white pulse deviates from the nominal value by the displayed value.
TV Settings > ATV > Vision > White Limiter
Setting item
Description
Limiter
Switches the white limiter on or off.
Threshold
Sets the threshold for the white limiter.
Display
Description
Limiter Active
Status display for indicating if the white limiter responds.
- 5.83 -
E-2
Chapter 5
9.2.3
9.2.4
2100.4400.32
Operating
TV Settings > ATV > Vision > Sync Pulse
Setting item
Explanation
Regeneration
Used to switch sync-pulse regeneration on or off
Sync Amplitude
Used to set the amplitude of the regenerated sync pulse (with regeneration switched on)
Display
Explanation
Sync Monitoring
Indicates the status of sync-pulse monitoring of the input signal. The following may be displayed:
– OK: A standard input signal is being applied
– no V: No V-pulse frame detected
– no H+V: No V and H-pulse frame detected
– too low: Sync-pulse amplitude is less than 50% of the nominal syncpulse amplitude; the processed signal is, however, available at the
encoder output
Sync Amplitude Input
Displays the measured input amplitude [mV] of the sync pulse. If the
selected scanning line is not found in the input signal, the measurement
value 0 mV is displayed.
Sync Amplitude
Output
Displays the measured output amplitude in [mV] of the sync pulse
TV Settings > ATV > Vision > Equalizer
Setting item
Explanation
Diplexer
Used to switch the diplexer pre-equalization (diplexer peaking) on or off
- 5.84 -
E-2
Chapter 5
9.3
Operating
Setting item
Explanation
Diplexer Peaking
Used to set the peaking in the range 0.1 dB to 2.5 dB at the band limit of
the upper sideband
Receiver
Pre-Equalization
Used to switch the receiver pre-equalization on or off
TV Settings > ATV > Sound Menu
The menu windows of the Sound menu are used to set the parameters for audio signal processing.
Menu windows
The Sound menu branches to the following menu windows:
– FM Audio Mode: Used to select the audio mode and adjust the pilot tone
– FM Carrier: Used to select the operating mode for the FM sound subcarrier, and to set
the deviation and deviation limiter for the FM sound subcarrier
– FM Precorrection: Used to switch on and adjust the sound phase shifter
– NICAM Audio Mode: Used to select the NICAM audio mode
– NICAM Carrier: Used to select the operating mode for the NICAM sound subcarrier and
to switch the precorrection for the NICAM sound subcarrier on or off
9.3.1
TV Settings > ATV > Sound > FM Audio Mode
Setting item
Description
Coder Mode
Setting of the audio mode.
The following settings are possible: Off, Mono, Stereo, Dual and Auto
(Dataline). The selected TV standard determines the assignment of the
audio inputs to the FM sound subcarriers.
The following settings have a special meaning:
– Off: Dual sound is set as the audio mode
– Auto (Dataline): The audio mode is read from theaudio data line in the
picture signal.
2100.4400.32
- 5.85 -
E-2
Chapter 5
9.3.1.1
Operating
Setting item
Description
Dataline
Selects the audio data line present in the picture signal; this is necessary for the Coder Mode > Auto setting.
Pilot
Switches the pilot signal on or off; not active in conjunction with NICAM.
Pilot Gain
Sets the level for the pilot signal; not active in conjunction with NICAM.
Display
Description
Dataline Info
Display of the indication of the audio mode present in the audio data line
(N/A means there is no indication in the selected audio data line).
Current Audio Mode
Display of the audio mode that is currently set.
Current Pilot
Deviation
Display of the FM deviation for the pilot signal.
Audio Mode
The audio inputs are assigned to the sound subcarriers according to the selected TV standard. This assignment is then displayed under Carrier 1 and Carrier 2 in the Status > TV
ATV menu window.
9.3.1.2
Audio Data Line
If "audio data line" is preselected as the source for determining the audio mode and it cannot be found in the picture signal, the manual settings will apply.
9.3.1.3
Pilot Signal
In order to indicate the audio mode, a pilot signal is added to the AF2 signal which modulates sound subcarrier 2.
9.3.2
2100.4400.32
TV Settings > ATV > Sound > FM Carrier
- 5.86 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Setting item
Explanation
Carrier 1/Carrier 2
Used to set the mode for FM sound subcarrier 1 or 2; the following settings are possible:
– Carrier OFF: Switches off the sound subcarrier
– Modulation OFF: Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation
– ON: Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation
Nom. Deviation
[Carrier 1/Carrier 2]
Used to set the nominal FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1 and 2
Deviation Limiter
Used to switch the deviation limiter for the FM sound subcarrier on or off
Limiter Threshold
Used to set a threshold at which the deviation limiter is triggered
Warning Above
Used to set a threshold at which the deviation limiter warning is activated
In most cases, it is recommendable for Limiter Threshold and Warning
Above to have the same value.
9.3.2.1
Display
Explanation
Current Deviation
[Carrier 1/Carrier 2]
Indicates the current FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1 and 2
Limitation
[Carrier 1/Carrier 2]
Status display which indicates whether the deviation limiter has triggered
FM Deviation
Nominal deviation
The nominal deviation determines the FM deviation which arises with the preemphasis
switched off if a sinusoidal signal with the frequency of 500 Hz and a level corresponding
to the nominal input level (see the "Input level" section) is fed into the AF input.
Suggestions for setting the FM deviation
You can modify the FM deviation by varying the input level (with an unchanged setting for
the nominal input level) or by varying the setting for the nominal deviation.
The deviation should never be increased by increasing the input level since this will decrease the drive reserve (see "Permissible input level"), producing a risk of clipping the signal.
Instead, the nominal input level should be set equal to the current input level and the deviation should be increased by increasing the setting for the nominal deviation.
2100.4400.32
- 5.87 -
E-2
Chapter 5
9.3.3
Operating
TV Settings > ATV > Sound > FM Precorrection
This window is used to precorrect the phase of the sound subcarrier for combined operation. Precorrection is performed separately for each of the two FM sound subcarriers
(Carrier 1 and Carrier 2). Two setting items are defined for each of the two FM sound subcarriers.
9.3.3.1
Setting item
Description
Precorrection
Switches the sound phase shifter on or off.
Inset Point 1
Determines the position of the 1st inset point referred to the drive of the
picture signal.
Slope 1
Determines the sharpness at the 1st inset point.
Inset Point 2
Determines the position of the 2nd inset point referred to the drive of the
picture signal.
Slope 2
Determines the sharpness at the 2nd inset point.
Sound Phase Shifter
This sound phase shifter modifies the phase of the sound subcarrier as a function of the
low-frequency drive of the picture signal in order to precorrect the phase of the sound subcarrier during combined operation.
When the sound phase shifter is switched on, its characteristic curve is determined using
two inset points.
The reference for setting the position is initially a value of 37.5% for the rear black shoulder.
Smaller values are in the range of the sync pulse. A value of 0% corresponds to a sync
pulse amplitude of 500 mV. Larger values are in the picture range. A value of 90% corresponds to picture amplitude of 700 mV.
There is an additional condition that the setting for inset point 1 must always be greater than
that of inset point 2. The sharpness of the two inset points is determined by the slope of the
characteristic curve at these points. The magnitude of the setting determines the magnitude
of the phase shift. A setting of 50% specifies the maximum value. The sign of the setting
value determines whether the phase is shifted in the positive or negative direction.
2100.4400.32
- 5.88 -
E-2
Chapter 5
9.3.3.2
Operating
Computation of Characteristic Curve
In computing the characteristic curve, it is divided using the two inset points into three linear
ranges.
If the picture signal is driven in the range between the two inset points, no phase shift occurs, i.e. a correction phase of 0° is set.
If the picture signal is driven greater than the position of inset point 1, a correction phase
not equal to 0° is set. The characteristic curve in this range begins with a correction phase
of 0°, for a drive level corresponding to the position of inset point 1, and increases linearly
up to the maximum phase set with inset sharpness 1 for drive of the picture signal of 100%.
Analogously, for drive of the picture signal which is less than the position of inset point 2, a
correction phase not equal to 0° is also set. The characteristic curve in this range begins
with a correction phase of 0°, for a drive level corresponding to the position of inset point 2,
and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with inset sharpness 2 for drive of the
picture signal of 0%.
9.3.4
9.3.5
2100.4400.32
TV Settings > ATV > Sound > NICAM Audio Mode
Setting item
Description
Audio Mode
Determines the NICAM audio mode (possible only in the NICAM coder
mode):
– Equal FM Audio Mode: The NICAM audio mode is oriented towards
the FM audio mode.
– Mono/Data, Stereo and Dual Sound: These settings determine the
NICAM audio mode regardless of the FM channel; the encoding takes
place in accordance with the NICAM specifications.
Reserve Sound
Switching Flag
This flag can be set (On) or not set (Off);
possible only in the NICAM coder mode.
TV Settings > ATV > Sound > NICAM Carrier
- 5.89 -
E-2
Chapter 5
2100.4400.32
Operating
Setting item
Explanation
Carrier Mode
Used to set the mode for the NICAM sound subcarrier; the following settings are possible:
– Carrier OFF: Switches off the sound subcarrier
– Modulation OFF: Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation
– ON: Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation
NICAM Precorrection
Used to switch the precorrection for the NICAM sound subcarrier on or
off; the actual precorrection takes place using the precorrector GUI.
PRBS insertion
Used to activate/deactivate PRBS for the NICAM carrier
- 5.90 -
E-2
Chapter 5
10
Operating
Reference Sources: TV Settings > Reference
Menu
The menu windows in the TV Settings > Reference menu are used to select reference
sources for stabilizing frequency processing (reference frequency source) and 1 pps sources (e.g. optional internal GPS receiver).
In addition, the behavior of the transmitter if the reference sources for frequency processing
and the 1 pps fail can also be set.
Menu windows
The TV Settings > Reference menu branches to the following menu windows and menu
paths:
– Common: Used to select the reference source and adjust the behavior on failure
– GPS menu path: Used to set the antenna type; GPS status displays
10.1
2100.4400.32
TV Settings > Reference > Common
Setting item
Description
Reference
Selects the reference frequency source. The following settings are possible:
– Internal: Operation without external reference frequency source
– External 5 MHz: Operation with external 5 MHz reference applied
– External 10 MHz: Operation with external 10 MHz reference applied
– External 1pps: Operation with external time reference (1 pps)
– Internal GPS: Operation with optional internal GPS receiver
Monitoring Output
For selecting the signal which will be delivered via the REF OUT monitor
socket on the rear panel of the instrument. The following settings are
possible:
– Off: Monitoring output disabled
– 10 MHz: OCXO stabilized 10-MHz frequency
– 1 PPS Generated: Internally generated PPS
– 1 kHz: 1-kHz signal
– 1 PPS Input:
– If reference = Internal/external xx: External PPS
– If reference = Internal GPS: PPS from GPS receiver
OCXO Adjust
Setting for adjusting the internal OCXO frequency (for "Internal" mode)
- 5.91 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Setting item
Description
Mute on PPS Fail
Used to determine the behavior in SFN mode in the event of failure of
the external time reference. The following settings are possible:
– off: The output signal is not suppressed
– only at startup: The output signal is suppressed at startup until a valid
1 pps signal is detected; if the 1 pps signal fails after successful synchronization, the output signal is no longer suppressed
– after fail delay time: The output signal is suppressed if the 1 pps signal fails for longer than the period specified under Fail Delay Time
This is the recommended setting for operation in SFN mode.
Mute on Ref. Fail
Used to determine the behavior in SFN and MFN mode in the event of
failure of the external reference frequency source. The following settings
are possible:
– off: The output signal is not suppressed
– only at startup: The output signal is suppressed at startup until a valid
reference source is detected; if the reference source fails after successful synchronization, the output signal is no longer suppressed
– after fail delay time: The output signal is suppressed if the reference
source fails for longer than the period specified under Fail Delay Time
This is the recommended setting for operation in SFN mode.
Fail Delay Time
If a reference source fails, the time specified here must elapse before
the output signal is suppressed. The setting is effective if "after fail delay
time" is set under Mute on PPS Fail or Mute on Ref. Fail.
Selection: 0 to 24 hours; 0 hours = no delay time
10.1.1
Reference Frequency Source
The basis for frequency generation is a 10 MHz oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO).
This OCXO can be operated in different modes:
"Internal" mode
The OCXO runs in uncontrolled mode.
It obtains its control voltage via a D/A converter which can be set using the OCXO adjust
setting item. This allows the OCXO frequency applied at the test output REF OUT (X29,
rear panel of the transmitter) to be adjusted to 10 MHz where necessary.
"External 5 MHz" and "External 10 MHz" modes
The OCXO runs in controlled mode.
Due to the control, the control voltage generated by the D/A converter is adapted on an ongoing basis so that the 10 MHz frequency of the OCXO is synchronized with the externally
supplied 5 MHz or 10 MHz reference frequency.
2100.4400.32
- 5.92 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
"External 1pps" mode
The OCXO runs in controlled mode.
The 10 MHz frequency of the OCXO is synchronized with the external seconds pulse. In
this mode, for example, SFN operation is possible without separate feed of a 10 MHz reference.
"Internal GPS" mode
The OCXO runs in controlled mode.
The 10 MHz frequency of the OCXO is synchronized with an optional internal GPS receiver.
10.1.2
Operation in Single-Frequency Network (SFN)
The following settings are permissible for operation in SFN mode:
– External 10 MHz: Requires an external 10-MHz clock and an external PPS
– External 1pps: Requires a feed from an external seconds pulse (PPS pulse)
– Internal GPS: (Possible only if GPS option installed) requires an external GPS antenna
to be connected
10.1.3
Holdover Mode (If Reference Frequency Fails)
As soon as a failure of the external reference frequency is detected, the control voltage for
the OCXO is no longer modified. The result of this is that the RF generation is now based
on the stability of the OCXO.
As soon as the external reference frequency is restored, the control voltage on the OCXO
will be controlled again with the externally supplied reference frequency.
10.2
TV Settings > Reference > GPS Submenu
The menu windows in the TV Settings > Reference > GPS menu contain information for
operation of the internal optional GPS receiver as a frequency and time reference. There is
also a setting to allow an active GPS antenna to be supplied with power from the transmitter.
The information on the accuracy of the position and time determination and the number and
quality of the received satellites allows the suitability of the antenna location to be assessed.
It is therefore used for planning and control purposes.
Menu windows
The GPS menu branches to the following menu windows:
2100.4400.32
- 5.93 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
– Status: Used to set the GPS antenna type; status displays for antenna and satellite reception as well as position and time information together with accuracy
– Satellites: Displays the quality and signal/noise ratio of the received satellites
10.2.1
TV Settings > Reference > GPS > Status
Setting item
Description
Active antenna
Used to set the GPS antenna type
The following settings are possible:
– active: The antenna is supplied with DC voltage (5 V) from the GPS
module
– passive: The antenna is not supplied with DC voltage from the GPS
module
Longer cables can be used with active antennas ("active" setting).
Show Position
The switch can be used to suppress the location coordinates display.
You need configuration rights in order to change the setting.
– yes: Once the GPS receiver can determine its position, precise coordinates are displayed under Latitude and Longitude.
– no: Once the position is known, xx° xx.xxxx’ is displayed.
In the absence of lock (position unknown) this is always displayed as
??° ??.????’ regardless of the switch setting.
Display
Description
Satellites used
Number of satellites currently being used for position and time determination
Satellites in view
Number of satellites currently being received
Antenna state
Status of GPS ANTENNA antenna input (X2)
With active antennas, the following may be displayed:
– OK: The active antenna is correctly connected
– OPEN: No active antenna is connected
– SHORT: A short-circuit has been detected at the antenna input
– UNKNOWN: The antenna status cannot be determined (standard display when "Antenna type" is set to "passive")
The status display is not available for passive antennas.
2100.4400.32
- 5.94 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Display
Description
Latitude
Latitude in WGS84
Operating
The computed coordinate is only displayed if Show Position = yes has
been set.
Longitude
Longitude in WGS84
The computed coordinate is only displayed if Show Position = yes has
been set.
Time Mode
Status display for the current time mode
The following displays are possible:
– Survey In: The receiver computes its own exact position and accumulates position data for optimum precision.
After a power failure, it takes a relatively long time before the receiver
has synchronized with the satellites and can deliver a stable reference.
– Fixed Mode: The receiver has stored a precise position.
After a power failure, the receiver can deliver a stable reference again
after a relatively short time.
UTC
Received coordinated universal time (UTC)
Display e.g. 12:34:56
Time DOP
Time Dilution of Precision
A value < 2 indicates a high degree of precision
10.2.2
TV Settings > Reference > GPS > Satellites
The Satellites menu window contains a list of received satellites (Sat ID) showing reception
quality and signal/noise ratio. The list is sorted by C/N value (best value at top). The number
of lines displayed varies according to the number of visible satellites.
Display
Description
Sat ID
ID for a received satellite
Quality Indicator [ID]
Reception quality for the satellite concerned together with the following
classification:
– 0: Satellite not visible
– 1,2 : Receiver searching for satellite signal
– 3: Receiver has detected a satellite signal, but signal is unusable
– 4: Receiver has switched to the C/A code (coarse acquisition code)
– 5, 6: Receiver has switched to the C/A code and carrier L1
– 7: Receiver can read out satellite data with 50 bps
C/N [ID]
Signal/noise ratio referenced to carrier
The value should be at least 35 dB.
2100.4400.32
- 5.95 -
E-2
Chapter 5
11
Operating
Basic Settings: System Setup Menu
The menu windows in the System Setup menu are used to enter the default settings for
transmission mode, signal processing and operating the instrument.
Optional software options can also be activated and the electronic type plates for the instrument can be read out for service purposes.
Menu windows/menu paths
The System Setup menu branches to the following menu windows and menu paths:
– Ethernet: Used to configure the Ethernet interfaces
– SNMP menu path: Used to configure the SNMP connection
– Date | Time: Used to enter the current date and time
– Option Keys menu path: For activating/deactivating software options; displaying the
status of software options; displaying built-in hardware options
– Tx Type menu path: For setting TV standards ATV, DVB or ATSC; setting and enabling
the time scheduler for multi-standard operating mode; defining special behavior patterns
for the parallel remote control interface
– Device Info menu path: Displays electronic type plates
11.1
System Setup > Ethernet
The System Setup > Ethernet menu window is used to configure the two Ethernet interfaces for operation by PC or network client.
2100.4400.32
Setting item/display
Explanation
Local Ethernet
The interface X30 (ETHERNET LOCAL) is used to connect the PC or
laptop for local operation via a web browser.
IP Address
IP address of the Ethernet interface X30. To allow communication with a
connected PC, the address must be in the subnet of the network interface of the PC.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask of the Ethernet interface X30. To allow communication with a connected PC, the subnet mask must correspond to
that of the PC.
MAC
Displays the unique hardware address of the Ethernet interface X30
- 5.96 -
E-2
Chapter 5
11.1.1
Operating
Setting item/display
Explanation
Remote Ethernet
The interface X31 (ETHERNET REMOTE) is used for connection to a
customer-specific remote monitoring system (remote operation).
IP Address
IP address of the Ethernet interface X31. To allow communication with a
remote network client, the address must be in the subnet of the remote
monitoring system.
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask of the Ethernet interface X31. To allow communication
with a remote network client, the subnet mask must correspond to that
of the remote monitoring network.
MAC
Displays the unique hardware address of the Ethernet interface X31
Gateway
Used to enter the gateway address (specified by the network administrator)
Preset IP Addresses
The Ethernet interfaces of the instrument are factory-configured as follows:
11.2
IP address
Subnet mask
ETHERNET LOCAL (X30)
192.168.057.253
255.255.255.0
ETHERNET REMOTE (X31)
192.168.058.253
255.255.255.0
System Setup > Com-Port
The System Setup > Com-Port menu window is used to activate and configure external
communication via Ethernet or RS-232-C/RS-485 by means of the BitBus or I20x protocol.
Note
2100.4400.32
The instrument described here only supports the BitBus protocol type via Ethernet. The
range of functions available in the menu window is therefore limited.
- 5.97 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Setting item
Explanation
Protocol Type
Used to select the protocol type for external communication
Operating
– OFF: Communication is deactivated
– Bitbus: BitBus protocol is activated
– I20x: I20x protocol is activated (via serial interface only)
Port Type
Used to select the port type
– TCP: Ethernet remote interface
– RS-232-C: D-Sub interface
– RS-485: D-Sub interface
Port
Used to select the logical port number for the BitBus communication via
Ethernet
Baudrate
Used to set the transmission rate for port type RS-232-C or RS-485
I20x Address
Used to configure the protocol address to Exciter A or Exciter B for port
type RS-232-C or RS-485
Checksum
Used to switch CRC-secured transmission on/off
The same setting must be made for the recipient of the messages.
11.3
Display
Explanation
Connected
ON: Indicates that a connection to the called station exists
Context menu
Explanation
Reconnect
This function is used to set up the connection again after changes have
been made to the settings
System Setup > SNMP Submenu
The operating software of the transmitter has an agent. This agent can communicate with
a remote management station that is used for monitoring and remote control via SNMP protocol. The agent is configured in the menu windows of the System Setup > SNMP menu.
Menu windows
The SNMP menu branches to the following menu windows:
2100.4400.32
- 5.98 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
– General: Used to set the UDP port for SET/GET and to activate message suppression
for local operation mode
– Manager: Used to set access protection for communities
– Alarmsinks: Used to configure alarm sinks
Note
To be able to use the SNMP functionality of the transmitter, the appropriate software option
must be activated.
11.3.1
SNMP > General Menu Window
Function
Explanation
Port SET/GET
UDP port for SNMP SET/GET
Default setting: 161
Inhibit Status
Switch for message suppression in Local mode
– Off: Traps (alarm messages) are sent in both operating modes
(Remote and Local)
– On: No traps are sent in Local mode but the alarms are stored; exception: trap for Local Mode
Default setting: Off
If OIDs are polled with message suppression active, the return value is 0
(undefined). In this operating state, SNMP commands (SET) are not
executed but simply confirmed.
When the Remote mode is reactivated, all stored alarms are sent once.
The polling of OIDs again returns current values.
Max. not transmitted
Number of alarms to be stored if message suppression is active
Default setting: 255
2100.4400.32
- 5.99 -
E-2
Chapter 5
11.3.2
Operating
SNMP > Manager Menu Window
Function
Explanation
Access Level [1 … 5]
Used to select access authorization for one of five user groups
– Read Only: For GET (only read access to the agent)
– Read / Write: For SET (read and write access to the agent)
Community [1 … 5]
Used to set the SNMP community string (a type of password) for a user
group
Default setting: "public" for read only (GET) and "broadcast" for read /
write (SET)
Case-sensitive!
Enable
Used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) a community
The Off setting is used for configuration purposes and for testing.
11.3.3
SNMP > Alarmsinks Menu Window
Function
Description
Alarmsink
Used to select one of 5 alarm sinks for configuration
Enable
Used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) a selected alarm sink
The Off setting is used for configuration purposes and for testing.
IP Address
IP address of the alarm sink to which alarms are to be sent
Port
UDP port for the SNMP alarms
Default setting: 162
2100.4400.32
- 5.100 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Function
Description
Alarm Version
SNMP version in which the alarm is to be sent (v1 Trap, v2c Trap)
Community
Used to select the community (access protection)
The community set here must also be used on the manager side. A distinction is made between upper-case and lower-case characters.
Communities are configured in the SNMP > Manager menu.
11.4
System Setup > Date | Time
The date and precise time are required to make correct logbook entries. This information is
supplied by the realtime clock of the instrument. If necessary, the time and date can be corrected in the System Setup > Date | Time menu window.
Setting item
Explanation
Date
Used to set the current date
Local Time
Used to set the local time
The local time is the time of day or zone time applicable at the station.
Unlike universal time (UTC = universal time coordinated), there is a positive offset for time zones east of Greenwich or a negative offset for time
zones west of Greenwich.This offset is determined by the time zone and
is always a multiple of a full hour or sometimes of a half hour.
In some countries, the clock is set forward by 1 hour in summer (daylight
saving time). The time offset relative to UTC then changes correspondingly.
UTC Time Offset
11.5
Used to enter the time offset between local time and UTC
System Setup > Option Keys Menu
Certain features of the device are activated using the Option Keys mechanism.
2100.4400.32
- 5.101 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Each available software option can be enabled by installing a valid activation key. If a software option is later no longer required, activation can be canceled again by installing a deactivation key.
Note
The deactivation mechanism allows software options which are no longer required to be
"returned" to Rohde & Schwarz.
Option keys are available from your local Rohde & Schwarz sales partners.
Installing option keys
Option keys can be installed in two ways:
– Automatic installation of one or more activation keys using the Software Distributor
The procedure is the same as for performing software updates (see the chapter "Maintenance").
– Installation of an option key by means of a web browser
With this method, the option key can be transferred from, for example, a received mail
using the copy/paste function.
The second method uses the installation menu TV Settings > System Setup > Option >
Install described below.
11.5.1
System Setup > Option Keys > Status
The System Setup > Option Keys > Status menu window lists the available software options with their respective activation status.
2100.4400.32
List column
Description
The K material number and stock number of the device are used to
order an option key to activate a software option from Rohde & Schwarz
sales partners.
- 5.102 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
List column
Description
Name
Name of the software option
—
Status of a software option:
– Green (OK): Option has been activated
– Gray: Option has not been activated
Validity
Validity period of an installed option key:
– Permanent: Option activated for an unlimited period (standard
license)
– "Expiration date": Option remains activated until the displayed expiration date (e.g. as a test license)
Note
There must be (at least) one software option activated for the TV standard in order for the
transmitter to generate an RF signal at the output.
11.5.2
System Setup > Option Keys > Install
The System Setup > Option Keys > Install menu window is used to install option keys
manually.
2100.4400.32
Setting item
Explanation
Option Key
Used to enter a 30-digit code to activate (or deactivate) a software
option. Entry of the code is completed with Enter or OK.
- 5.103 -
E-2
Chapter 5
11.5.3
Operating
Display
Explanation
Status
– Status = OK: The mechanism used to activate/deactivate software
options is supported by the hardware.
To be able to use a software option, the associated option key must
be installed.
– No key needed: The mechanism used to activate/deactivate software
options is not supported by the hardware.
All available software options can be used without installing option
keys.
Message
Dialog box with the following messages:
– Please enter a key: Prompt to enter a key
– Key OK: Key entered successfully (the display changes back to
"Please enter a key" after a few moments)
– Key deactivated: Deactivation key entered successfully (the display
changes back to "Please enter a key" after a few moments)
– Invalid format: Invalid key entered
System Setup > Option Keys > Deactivations
The System Setup > Option Keys > Deactivations menu window lists software options
which were once active, but have been deactivated again using a deactivation key.
2100.4400.32
Column
Explanation
The K material number and stock number of the device are used for
ordering an option key to activate a software option from Rohde &
Schwarz sales partners.
Name
Name of the software option
- 5.104 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Column
Explanation
Response
Acknowledgment code as a system response to a deactivation
To prove that a software option has been deactivated, the acknowledgment code must be sent to the Rohde & Schwarz sales partner (e.g. by
e-mail).
11.5.4
System Setup > Option Keys > HW Options
The System Setup > Option Keys > HW Options menu window contains a list of the installed hardware options.
11.6
List column
Description
Abbreviated option number
Name
Name of the hardware option
System Setup > Tx Type Submenu
Use the System Setup > Tx Type submenu to set the TV standard. It also includes a time
scheduler for time-controlled transmission using different TV standards (multi-standard operating mode) and further settings that affect the behavior of the parallel remote control interface and the whole system.
Menu windows
The Tx Type menu branches to the following menu windows:
2100.4400.32
- 5.105 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
– Transmitter: Used to select the TV standard, to activate message suppression for the
parallel remote interface, to determine the behavior of the parallel remote interface when
switching between analog TV and digital TV, to activate the time scheduler for multistandard operation and to enter the transmitter name
– Configuration: Used to select and configure the TV standards for time-controlled
switchover
– Time Scheduler: Used to define switching times for time-controlled switchover of the
standards
11.6.1
System Setup > Tx Type > Transmitter
The System Setup > Tx Type > Transmitter menu window is used among other things to
set the input interfaces and signal processing the appropriate TV standard. You can also
activate a time scheduler for multi-standard operating mode and enter special settings for
the parallel remote control interface.
Setting item
Explanation
Tx Type
Used to select the TV standard: ATV, DVB or ATSC
The instrument is rebooted automatically when the TV standard is
changed. Signal processing is also switched over.
Reset On Program
Off
In the ON switch position, a Reset Fault is automatically triggered when
the RF output is locked.
Time Scheduler
Used to switch time-controlled tasks planned using the time scheduler
on and off
Par I/O DTV setting
The parallel remote interface can be used to switch from ATV to DTV.
The switch determines which standard is used for DTV.
Par I/O Inhibit Status
Used to switch message suppression for the parallel remote interface on
and off
– OFF: Message suppression is not activated; messages carried by the
parallel remote interface are also output in local mode
– ON: Message suppression is activated; in local mode, no messages
are output via the parallel remote interface
Tx Name
2100.4400.32
Used to enter a transmitter name to make identification easier
- 5.106 -
E-2
Chapter 5
11.6.2
Operating
System Setup > Tx Type > Configuration
You can use the System Setup > Tx Type > Configuration and System Setup > Tx Type
> Time Scheduler menu windows to define the rules for a time-controlled switchover between individual TV standards.
Using Configuration, when you have selected and specified the TV standards you can
then send them to the time schedule that you intend to configure.
Column
Description
Tx Std
For selecting the TV standards that have to be taken into account during
time-controlled switchover
Frequency
For setting the transmission frequency for the standard concerned
Power
For setting the output power for the standard concerned
Note
The values for Frequency and Power, unlike corresponding Synthesizer and Output Stage
settings, have priority as soon as the scheduled event is started.
11.6.3
System Setup > Tx Type > Time Scheduler
Time Scheduler is used to define switching times for the required switch between TV standards. Every switchover can be scheduled as an event that takes place once only or daily.
2100.4400.32
- 5.107 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Column
Description
Event
For defining the event type (selected via the context menu)
– Once: The switchover to the defined standard (TV Std column) takes
place once only at the chosen point in time (Start Date and Time columns)
– Daily: The switchover to the defined standard (TV Std column) takes
place each day at the chosen time of day (Time column) and takes
place for the first time on the scheduled start date (Start Date column)
As soon as the event type has been determined, the system creates
another empty event line.
Start Date
For scheduling a date for the switchover to the chosen standard
If the event type is Daily, the switchover takes place every day from the
start date onward.
Time
For scheduling a time for the switchover to the chosen standard
TV Std
For selecting the TV standard that the system has to switch over to
(selected via the context menu)
Only standards that have been specified in the Configuration menu windoware available for selection.
Example
The example in the above screenshot defines a day-night operating mode. Starting June
1st 2008, analog television is broadcast during the day from 06:00 hours onward, and in the
evening the system switches over to digital television at 23:00 hours. From January 1st
2009 at 03:00 in the morning there will be continuous digital transmission only.
11.7
System Setup > Device Info Menu
The menu windows under System Setup > Device Info contain the electronic type plates
for the instrument as a whole as well as for individual modules or elements:
– Device (complete device)
– Components (modules)
– Coder
– RF Board
– Amplifier
– GPS Board
– Receiver/Monitor
– Receiver AUX / Monitor AUX
– ParIO board (optional)
The structure of the different type plates is more or less identical. The type plates for the
complete device and the coder are shown in the examples.
2100.4400.32
- 5.108 -
E-2
Chapter 5
11.7.1
Operating
System Setup > Device Info > Device
Display
Explanation
Part Number
Stock number
Variant
Device variant
Product Index
Product change index
Serial Number
Serial number
Product Date
Date of production
SW/FW/BIOS Number
Stock number of the software, firmware or BIOS
SW/FW/BIOS Version
Version number of the software, firmware or BIOS
Operating hours
Number of operating hours
Power up cycles
Number of times the device has been switched on/off
The information saved here is used for troubleshooting purposes. If servicing is required,
this information allows you to precisely identify the device variant.
11.7.2
2100.4400.32
System Setup > Device Info > Boards > Coder/RF Board/
Amplifier/GPS Board/Receiver/ParIO
Display
Explanation
Part Number
Stock number
Variant
Module variant
Product Index
Product change index
- 5.109 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Display
Explanation
Serial Number
Serial number
Product Date
Date of production
BIOS Version
Version number of the BIOS (coder only)
Operating hours
Number of operating hours
Power up cycles
Number of times the device has been switched on/off
Operating
The information saved here is used for troubleshooting purposes. If servicing is required,
this information allows you to precisely identify the defective component and order a replacement.
2100.4400.32
- 5.110 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
12
Other Menus
12.1
Multiple Parameter Sets: Parameter Set Menu
You can use the Parameter Set menu window to create, load and save parameter sets for
a number of different overall configurations. If the operating environment changes (e.g.
change of frequency) you can access complete parameter sets instead of having to set
each individual value. You have eight memory locations available in addition to the active
memory location (for the parameter set loaded).
Function
Description
Parameter Set
2100.4400.32
Load settings from
For selecting a parameter set as the current parameter set; the currently
loaded parameter set acts as an independent copy of the stored parameter set.
Save settings to
For saving the currently active settings to the chosen memory location.
Copy set x to y
For selecting a parameter set x, the content of which you wish to save to
another memory location y. To start the copying procedure, select Copy
and confirm with OK.
Swap set x and y
For selecting two parameter sets x and y, the content of which you wish
to swap. To start the swap procedure, select Swap and confirm with OK.
- 5.111 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Function
Operating
Description
State
Loaded Set
Displays the active (i.e. loaded) parameter set
Operation State
Display showing the status of the action that is being carried out (Ready,
Loading, Saving, Copying)
Current Set Changed
Yellow: The device settings have been changed and no longer match
the settings of the loaded parameter set.
Names
Parameter Set 1
Name to describe the parameter set (e.g. intended use)
Parameter Set 2
See above
Parameter Set 3
See above
Parameter Set 4
See above
Parameter Set 5
See above
Parameter Set 6
See above
Parameter Set 7
See above
Parameter Set 8
See above
Settings that are not saved in parameter sets
Certain parameter settings that are valid only for the individual device, and a few other settings, are not saved. This includes:
– Instrument-specific parameters, such as OCXO Adjust
– Test mode settings, such as I/Q-Testsignal or Test Mode
– Limiter settings
– Port settings, such as in the Ethernet menu window
These settings remain valid regardless of which parameter set is currently loaded.
12.2
Saving Transmitter Information: Menu Item "TxTool"
(Web Browser Only)
In order to improve clarity and for archiving purposes, you can save transmitter data selected via the web browser (such as logbook or device information, measurement values or parameters) to an ASCII or HTML file. You can also delete and restore logbook entries of the
transmitter components.
2100.4400.32
- 5.112 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
1. Select TxTool in the browser window.
A security query appears first of all.
Note
Execution of the TxTool requires write rights to the file system of the computer. To grant
these rights you must confirm the security query.
If you select Always trust content from this author, the security query will not be displayed the next time the TxTool is called.
2. Confirm the security query with Run.
The TxTool window used to display and save transmitter data appears.
The window is initially empty when opened. The required settings must be selected before
the data is read out.
2100.4400.32
- 5.113 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Reading out data
1. Select (top left) the data that is to be displayed.
Different windows containing additional functions are displayed depending on the type
of data you select. Depending on the selected tab, the window will still be empty (e.g.
LogBooks) or the appropriate data will be displayed (e.g. DeviceInfo).
2. Select (depending on the window) which data is to be displayed (see the table under
"Functions in Logbooks Window").
3. Start readout of the data with Rescan (if this function is available in the window).
Saving data
Different options and formats are available for saving the data.
1. Under Output Format, select the file format in which the data is to be saved.
2. In the Output menu, select whether the data is to be saved as a file (Write to File) or
copied to the clipboard (Copy to Clipboard).
Depending on your selection, you can save the data in a file using the Windows Save
command or copy it to the clipboard and then use it in other applications.
Note
12.2.1
If the data is to be evaluated in a spreadsheet application (e.g. Microsoft Excel) it is advisable to copy the data to the clipboard in HTML format. If the clipboard is then copied
to an (empty) worksheet, the values are separated in tabular form.
Functions in LogBooks Window
The following additional functions are available in the Logbooks window:
2100.4400.32
Function
Explanation
Message Type
Used to select the type of messages which are to be listed (more than
one option can be selected)
Device
Used to select the transmitter components for which message data is to
be displayed (more than one option can be selected)
Display
Used to show and hide the columns Counts (shows the number of messages of this message type) and Source (shows the transmitter component to which the message is assigned)
Last/First On Top
Sorts the displayed messages according to the time at which they
occurred
Clear
(Real) deletion of the logbook entries (identical to deleting the logbook
entries using the context menu of the Logbook menu window)
Restore
(Real) restoration of the logbook entries (identical to restoring the logbook entries using the context menu of the Logbook menu window)
Rescan
Updates the displayed messages
- 5.114 -
E-2
Chapter 5
12.3
Operating
Saving Transmitter Data: Storage Menu (Web
Browser Only)
You can save the parameter data of the transmitter on an external medium and then recall
this data when required.
Note
This function is described in the chapter "Maintenance".
12.4
Menu Item "SNMP Administration" (Web Browser
Only)
With the menu item SNMP Administration, you can download the Management Information Base (MIB) of the SNMP agent to configure the management station by means of this
information.
After calling up the menu item, a further browser window will be opened inviting you to
download data:
2100.4400.32
- 5.115 -
E-2
Chapter 5
13
Operating
Introduction to Manual Precorrection
Factory set precorrection curves v. manual precorrection
The transmitter equipment includes factory preset precorrection curves covering every frequency range and all dynamic ranges. The appropriate precorrection curve is automatically
loaded in each case, so as a rule manual precorrection is not needed.
In certain cases the precorrection can be further optimized by manual precorrection. Precorrection can then be carried out for different frequencies and output powers. Since manual precorrection does not overwrite any factory set precorrection curves, the factory
defaults can be restored at any time (see section "Characteristic Curves" in "Loading an existing characteristic curve").
User interface for manual precorrection
The corrector is operated with the aid of a web browser. The transmitter makes a Java applet (precorrector GUI) available for this purpose. This applet is launched in the web browser and contains all the elements for operating the corrector.
The following section is a brief introduction to the configuration and use of this software.
This is followed by a description of the individual menus for setting the corrector.
13.1
Launching Precorrector GUI
The precorrector GUI is integrated in the transmitter web browser interface. Before the precorrector GUI is launched, therefore, the conditions must be created for remote operation
from a locally connected PC or remote control via a distant network client.
Note
For further information on installing and configuring remote operation from a local PC or remote control via a distant network client, refer to the section "Remote Operation and Remote Control" earlier in this chapter.
1. From your browser, call the web GUI and log on with Configuration rights.
2. Launch the precorrector GUI by going to the Navigator window in the web GUI, below
the Precorrection entry, and double-clicking on Start Precorrector-GUI.
While the program is starting up, the message Starting ADE GUI will be displayed. After
a brief time, the initial operating window for the precorrector should appear.
Note
An additional empty browser window will appear. If this window is closed, the Precorrector
GUI will also be terminated.
Note
If the browser supports tabs (e.g. Internet Explorer 7), a new window is not created. The
precorrector GUI opens in a new tab instead.
2100.4400.32
- 5.116 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Fig. 19 Initial operating window in the precorrector GUI
The operating windows of the precorrector GUI are divided into the following areas:
Title bar (for separately opened window only)
Menu bar
Selection column with tabs
Work area
The menu bar and selection column are the same for all of the windows in the precorrector
GUI.
Title bar
The title bar contains the following information:
Name of the exciter that is currently being operated
Transmitter type
Menu bar
The menu bar comprises the following program commands:
2100.4400.32
- 5.117 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Parameters > Rescan
Refresh to show all parameters that can be displayed in the GUI
Cal > Calibration
Access to the alignment parameters – for production staff only
Help > Help
Access to help information
About > About this
Information about the software version
Selection column
The selection column contains the following tabs:
Linear
Opens the operating window for the linear corrector.
Nonlinear
Opens the operating window for the nonlinear corrector.
FreqCorrection
Opens the operating window for nonlinear frequency response correction.
Work area
The work area contains the fields required by the different operating windows. Use the fields
to perform precorrection.
13.2
Operating Functions
13.2.1
Operating Fields
The precorrection settings can be entered using three operating fields. Besides the characteristic field, the operating fields contain different operating elements such as buttons, input
fields and checkboxes.
Depending on your system configuration, the following operating fields will be present:
Linear Precorrection
Nonlinear Precorrection
Nonlinear frequency response precorrection
The following figure provides a basic view of how an operating field is structured:
2100.4400.32
- 5.118 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Fig. 20 Basic structure of an operating field
Each operating field consists of graphics areas and functional areas.
The graphics areas are used to display the set characteristics. Here, you can interactively
modify, reset or redraw the characteristics. You can also set a default characteristic. Using
a contextual menu, you can access additional functions as well as a navigator for fine adjustment.
There are two graphics areas per operating field. The upper graphics area 1 is used to display amplitude precorrections. The lower graphics area 2 is used to display phase or group
delay precorrections.
The functional area contains buttons, input field, checkboxes and message windows that
are used to manage the precorrection process. It is divided into the following areas:
Main functions
This area contains functions that apply to all of the displayed precorrection (ON/OFF,
choice of manual or automatic mode).
Function area 1
This area contains functions referring to the curve in graphics area 1.
Function area 2
This area contains functions referring to the curve in graphics area 2.
Note
2100.4400.32
In certain operating windows, some of these areas will not be present.
- 5.119 -
E-2
Chapter 5
13.2.2
Operating
Graphics Areas
The graphics area basically consists of display and drawing levels. In many operating fields,
the drawing level is not necessary.
Display level (blue characteristic)
In the display level, the characteristic that is currently set in the precorrector is displayed. If
the precorrector function is switched off, a note to this effect will appear in the diagram.
To display the characteristic, the database is read from the precorrector and the curve is
computed with the same function as forms the basis of computation for the setting parameters and the FPGA. This ensures that the display and the effect are exactly matched.
In addition, the display level also contains additional functions such as the position of the
carrier frequency or center frequency, notable drive level of the signal or the position of
thresholds relative to the display range.
Drawing level (red characteristic)
In the drawing level, you can create a new characteristic or edit an existing one.
You can access the database data for the characteristic for further processing from the display level. The curve is edited directly on the data from the database. The remainder of the
curve is computed with the same function as in the display level.
A contextual menu provides support in the process of editing curves. A navigator window
can be used to make a fine setting.
Note
The drawing levels are supported only in the operating fields for linear precorrection and
nonlinear precorrection. Only the display level supports nonlinear frequency response precorrection. At this level it is not possible to edit characteristic curves.
13.2.3
Characteristic Curves
The following settings are necessary in the functional area to create characteristic curves
manually or edit them:
Corr > On (precorrection active)
Correction Amplitude > On (upper characteristic active) or
Correction Groupdelay / Phase > On (lower characteristic active)
There are two ways of modeling a characteristic:
– Draw a new characteristic and edit the points.
– Load an existing characteristic (predefined characteristic or a characteristic saved on
the hard drive) and edit the points.
Modeling a characteristic involves use of the mouse, contextual menu and navigator window.
2100.4400.32
- 5.120 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Fig. 21 Contextual menu for the precorrector GUI
The contextual menu appears if you click on a vacant point of the drawing plane with the
right mouse button. You can use the contextual menu to call up the navigator window for
making fine settings.
Note
A precorrection curve is always modeled locally in the drawing plane (red curve) and then
written to the precorrection memory by the menu function Curve Data xxx Write.
Creating a new characteristic
To create a new characteristic, you must place the relevant points with the mouse into the
chart in order from left to right. First, a point is set at the minimum unit on the x axis. The
end is formed by a final point at the maximum unit on the x axis.
1. Click on the right mouse button to show the context menu and select the New Curve
menu item. When you are asked if you want to delete the curve already displayed, answer with OK.
2. Follow the prompting "Click to set curve points ..." and set the points one after the other
with the left mouse button.
The points are automatically joined to a curve.
2100.4400.32
- 5.121 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
3. Point to the right margin of the diagram with the mouse and set the last point.
Input mode will be terminated and you can now edit the curve as required (see the section "Editing the characteristic").
Loading an existing characteristic curve
Instead of creating a characteristic curve from scratch, you can load existing curves into the
drawing level and edit them as required. There are three possibilities:
– Select Preset Curve in the contextual menu. A preset curve highlighted in the program
is loaded into the display level (blue curve). Now, using the Edit Read Curve contextual
entry, transfer the characteristic curve into the drawing level (red curve).
– Use the Curve Data xxx Read function to load the current characteristic curve from the
precorrection memory straight into the drawing level (red curve).
– Load an existing precorrection from a file using the Storage function from the Navigator
window for transmitter operation.
– In the RF Out > Precorrection menu window use the Restore Current Setting or Restore All Settings parameter to reactivate the original precorrection curve (factory set
precorrection) in the instrument. Then in the precorrector GUI use Parameters > Rescan to update the display. The original precorrection curve is displayed.
Note
You may have to fetch the read precorrection curve with the Show Read Curve contextual
function into the foreground so it can be viewed.
Editing a characteristic
Characteristics are edited based on the points they contain. Each point in the database contains the following information: x value, y value, slope and locking of the slope. The number
of points is variable.
The characteristic is computed using one or more sectionally defined spline functions with
a specified start-point and end-point slope on the edges. The edges are considered to be
the right or left edge of the graphics as well as fixed points. A fixed point (recognizable by
a triangular symbol) "freezes" the slope of the curve. Like normal points, fixed points can
also be moved later on, but the slope due to the fixed point stays unchanged.
Existing points are edited directly. You can shift them with the mouse in the x and y directions (click and drag). Double-click to lock them (or to unlock them).
You can use the contextual menu to add and delete points and to lock and unlock their
slope. The procedure is as follows:
– Set Point:
1. Select the Set Point function.
2. Using the mouse, set a new point on the curve.
– Delete Point, Lock Point and Unlock Point:
1. Select the desired function.
2. Click on an existing point.
For fine setting of the characteristic, there is a navigator window available which can be
called up from the contextual menu. The navigator window can be used to set the point coordinates and the slope (fixed points only) as numerical values. The procedure is as follows:
2100.4400.32
- 5.122 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
1. Call up the navigator window.
Fig. 22 The navigator window
2. Click on the desired point with the mouse, or select it in the navigator window with the
arrow keys at Select Point.
The selected point is highlighted in red.
3. Set the coordinates and/or the slope with the input register in the navigator window.
By locking characteristic points, it is also possible to define ranges which can be edited without modifying the curve sections outside of the given range.
Note
When unlocking a locked point, more or less significant changes can arise in the characteristic between the two locked points that are closest to the point that was unlocked.
Setting characteristics in the precorrector
Basically, the edited curves are written using the Curve Data xxx > Write buttons individually for each characteristic type into the precorrector and set there.
In the case of nonlinear precorrection, writing of the edited curve is carried out immediately
during setting using the navigator window. Hysteresis becomes active which suppresses
immediate setting of the curve for a permanent change. Only the last value is set when exiting.
Clearing a characteristic in the precorrector
Using the Correction xxx Clear button, you can clear the characteristic set in the precorrector (and displayed in the display level).
Using the editing history
While editing a characteristic, the editing steps are recorded. You can undo the steps using
the Edit History xxx Undo button or redo them using the Edit History xxx Redo button.
Use the Edit History xxx Clear button to clear the editing history.
2100.4400.32
- 5.123 -
E-2
Chapter 5
13.3
Operating
Setting Linear Precorrection
The Linear operating field is for setting linear precorrection defaults which can be used to
compensate amplitude frequency response and group delay errors at the channel filter below the transmitter.
In the default setting this corrector is switched off.
Fig. 23 The Linear operating window
13.3.1
Main Function
The Corr > On/Off switch can be used to turn the entire linear precorrection on or off.
13.3.2
Linear Precorrection
During precorrection the characteristics for the amplitude-frequency response and group
delay are modeled in the drawing level and then written to the precorrection memory.
2100.4400.32
- 5.124 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Functions, area 1
The following settings are possible:
Correction Amplitude > On/Off: Switches amplitude frequency response precorrection
on or off.
Correction Amplitude Clear: Clears the data in the precorrector for the amplitude fre-
quency response precorrection; you will be asked if you are sure you want to do this.
Curve Data Amplitude Write: Writes the linear precorrector with the amplitude frequen-
cy response modeled in the drawing level.
Curve Data Amplitude Read: Reads out the amplitude frequency response set in the
linear precorrector and shows it in the display level.
Edit History Amplitude Undo / Redo / Clear: History memory; settings in the drawing
level can be undone step by step and redone. The history memory can also be cleared.
Functions, area 2
The following settings are possible:
Correction Groupdelay > On/Off: Switches group delay precorrection on or off.
Correction Groupdelay Clear: Clears the data in the precorrector for the group delay
precorrection; you will be asked if you are sure you want to do this.
Curve Data Group Delay Write: Writes the linear precorrector with the group delay
modeled in the drawing level.
Curve Data Groupdelay Read: Reads out the group delay set in the linear precorrector
and shows it in the display level.
Edit History Groupdelay Undo / Redo / Clear: History memory; settings in the draw-
ing level can be undone step by step and redone. The history memory can also be
cleared.
Graphics area 1: Modeling of the amplitude frequency response
The Linear Amplitude diagram (in graphics area 1) has a coordinate system for displaying
and editing the characteristic for the amplitude frequency response. The x axis is used to
show the frequency f in MHz relative to the carrier or to the center frequency. The y axis
shows the amplitude A in dB. The scaling on both axes is system-dependent.
The diagram has a drawing level and a display level.
In the drawing level, you can model the amplitude frequency response (red curve) locally.
With the mouse, the contextual menu and the navigator window, you can draw a new curve
or load and edit an existing curve. The characteristic data are then written into the precorrector using Curve Data Amplitude Write.
A curve read from the precorrector (Curve Data Amplitude Read) is shown in the display
level (blue curve). The Edit Read Curve contextual function allows you to transfer this curve
to the drawing level for editing. The contextual menu also lets you hide the display level.
The diagram indicates if amplitude frequency response precorrection is switched off. The
display and drawing levels still remain active, however.
For further details, please see the "Characteristic Curves" section.
2100.4400.32
- 5.125 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Graphics area 2: Modeling of the group delay
The Linear Groupdelay diagram (in graphics area 2) has a coordinate system for displaying and editing the characteristic for the amplitude frequency response. The x axis is used
to display the frequency f in MHz relative to the carrier or to the center frequency. The y axis
shows the group delay time t in ns. The scaling on both axes is system-dependent.
Otherwise, this works analogously to graphics area 1 except that the corresponding functions (e.g. for Read/Write) are found in area 2.
The diagram indicates if group delay precorrection is switched off. The display and drawing
levels still remain active, however.
In the contextual menu for the group delay precorrection, you can use the Reduce Delay
Range and Enlarge Delay Range commands to select between the two scalings for the y
axis. It is possible to display the following ranges of values:
Linear Precorrection
Reduced
0 ns to 750 ns
Enlarged
0 ns to 1500 ns
For further details, please see the "Characteristic Curves" section.
13.4
Setting Nonlinear Precorrection
The Nonlinear operating field is for setting nonlinear precorrection defaults to equalize nonlinearities in the output stage.
Nonlinear precorrection is a significant factor in the shoulder distance that is achieved.
2100.4400.32
- 5.126 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Fig. 24 The Nonlinear operating window
13.4.1
Main Function
The Corr > On/Off switch can be used to turn the entire nonlinear precorrection on or off.
13.4.2
Nonlinear Precorrection
For manual precorrection, you model the amplitude and phase characteristics in the drawing level and then write them to the precorrection memory.
Functions, area 1
The following settings are possible:
Correction Amplitude > On/Off: Switches the amplitude precorrection on or off.
Correction Amplitude Clear: Clears the data in the precorrector for the nonlinear am-
plitude precorrection; you will be asked if you are sure you want to do this.
Curve Data Amplitude Write: Writes the nonlinear precorrector with the amplitude
characteristic modeled in the drawing level.
2100.4400.32
- 5.127 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Curve Data Amplitude Read: Reads out the amplitude characteristic set in the nonlin-
ear precorrector and shows it in the display level.
Edit History Amplitude Undo / Redo / Clear: History memory; settings in the drawing
level can be undone step by step and redone. The history memory can also be cleared.
Functions, area 2
The following settings are possible:
Correction Phase > On/Off: Switches the phase precorrection on or off.
Correction Phase Clear: Clears the data in the precorrector for the nonlinear phase
precorrection; you will be asked if you are sure you want to do this.
Curve Data Phase Write: Writes the nonlinear precorrector with the phase characteris-
tic modeled in the drawing level.
Curve Data Phase Read: Reads out the phase characteristic set in the nonlinear pre-
corrector and shows it in the display level.
Edit History Phase Undo / Redo / Clear: History memory; settings in the drawing level
can be undone step by step and redone. The history memory can also be cleared.
Graphics area 1: Modeling of the amplitude characteristic
The NonLinear Amplitude diagram (in graphics area 1) has a coordinate system for displaying and editing the amplitude characteristic.
The x axis is used to display the drive level A in %. Note that 100% corresponds to the maximum system drive level. The y axis is used to display the delta drive level dA in % relative
to the maximum drive level. The scale ranges from -50% to +50%.
The diagram has a drawing level and a display level.
In the drawing level, you can model the amplitude characteristic (red curve) locally. With the
mouse, the contextual menu and the navigator window, you can draw a new curve or load
and edit an existing curve. The characteristic data are then written into the precorrector using Curve Data Amplitude Write.
A curve read from the precorrector (Curve Data Amplitude Read) is shown in the display
level (blue curve). The Edit Read Curve contextual function you to transfer this curve to the
drawing level for editing. The contextual menu also lets you hide the display level.
The diagram indicates if nonlinear amplitude precorrection is switched off. The display and
drawing levels still remain active, however.
For further details, please see the "Characteristic Curves" section.
Graphics area 2: Modeling of the phase characteristic
The NonLinear Phase diagram (in graphics area 2) has a coordinate system for displaying
and editing the phase characteristic.
The x axis is used to display the drive level A in %. Note that 100% corresponds to the maximum system drive level. The y axis is used to display the delta phase dP in angular degrees [°]. The scale ranges from -45° to +45°.
2100.4400.32
- 5.128 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Otherwise, this works analogously to graphics area 1 except that the corresponding functions (e.g. for Read/Write) are found in functional area 2.
The diagram indicates if nonlinear phase precorrection is switched off. The display and
drawing levels still remain active, however.
For further details, please see the "Characteristic Curves" section.
13.5
Setting Nonlinear Frequency Response
Precorrection
The FreqCorrection field is for setting extended nonlinear precorrection. You can specifically influence the effects of the amplitude and phase characteristics for low-frequency and
high-frequency signal components (frequency response correction).
All entries are numeric. The Amplitude and Phase diagrams show the characteristics of
nonlinear precorrection and the location of the thresholds (inset points) plus percentages
for the effect of the frequency response correction.
Fig. 25 The FreqCorrection operating window
2100.4400.32
- 5.129 -
E-2
Chapter 5
Operating
Main functions
Correction > On/Off: Switches the entire frequency response correction on or off.
Correction Point 1 (2) > On/Off: Switches frequency response correction on branch 1
(or 2) on or off.
Position Point 1 (2): Entry of the threshold for the point of frequency response correc-
tion 1 (or 2). Frequency response correction is effective only if the instantaneous drive
level exceeds this threshold; setting range: 0 ... 100%
Functions, area 1
Amplitude Slope Point 1 (2) > On/Off: Switches frequency response correction on
branch 1 (or 2) for the amplitude characteristic on or off.
Amplitude Slope Amplitude 1 (2): Sets amplitude frequency response correction for
the amplitude precorrections on branch 1 (or 2); setting range: -50 ... +50%. A positive
number increases the frequency response.
Amplitude Slope Phase 1 (2): Sets phase frequency response correction for the am-
plitude precorrections on branch 1 (or 2); setting range: -50 ... +50%. A positive number
increases the frequency response.
Functions, area 2
Phase Slope Point 1 (2) > On/Off: Switches frequency response correction on branch
1 (or 2) for the phase characteristic on or off.
Phase Slope Amplitude 1 (2): Sets amplitude frequency response correction for the
phase precorrection on branch 1 (or 2); setting range: -45 ... +45%. A positive number
increases the frequency response.
Phase Slope Phase 1 (2): Sets phase frequency response correction for the phase pre-
correction on branch 1 (or 2); setting range: -45 ... +45%. A positive number increases
the frequency response.
2100.4400.32
- 5.130 -
E-2
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 6.0 -
E-1
Chapter 6
Maintenance
CONTENTS
1 Maintenance Information ................................................................ 1
1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work ....................................................................1
1.2 Required Tools ...............................................................................................1
2 Software Update .............................................................................. 2
3 Backing Up Parameter Data ............................................................ 5
3.1 Saving Parameter Data on PC .......................................................................5
3.2 Loading Parameter Data from PC .................................................................7
4 Adjustment of I/Q Modulator .......................................................... 9
4.1 Manual Adjustment ........................................................................................9
5 Replacing Fan ................................................................................ 12
5.1 Removing Fan ...............................................................................................12
5.2 Installing Fan ................................................................................................14
2100.4400.32
- 6.01 -
E-2
Chapter 6
2100.4400.32
- 6.02 -
Maintenance
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance Information
1.1
Overview of Maintenance Work
Maintenance
The device has been designed to provide years of operation with little maintenance. Maintenance of the hardware is limited to:
Software updates (as required)
(for improved performance and for retrofitting options)
Replacement of fan after approx. 40000 operating hours
Replacement of fan mat (option)
Further actions:
Backup of parameter data to an external medium (recommended)
Adjustment of I/Q modulator (if required)
1.2
2100.4400.32
Required Tools
Software update
– PC
– Update data (on CD-ROM)
– RJ-45 cable (crossover or patch cable)
Backup of parameter data
– PC as backup medium
Replacement of fans
– Torx screwdriver TX10
Adjusting the I/Q Modulator
– Spectrum analyzer
- 6.1 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
Software Update
To perform a software update, you must connect the transmitter to a PC or network client
via the Ethernet and make sure that the interface (X30, ETHERNET LOCAL or X31, ETHERNET REMOTE) is correctly configured.
The procedure for performing a software update is as follows:
1. Deactivate the energy saving option of the network card in the PC. Proceed as follows:
a) Under Windows, open the Device Manager by selecting Start > Control Panel >
System > Hardware > Device Manager.
b) In the Device Manager, select the correct network adapter and then double-click to
open the associated Properties window.
c) In the Properties window, click the Power Management tab and (if required) deactivate the option Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power.
2. Start the installation software on the PC/client.
The start window of the R&S Software Distributor appears.
3. Select Remote Installation and confirm with Next.
The software updates that can be installed are displayed. You can obtain additional information about the update you select by highlighting it with the cursor and then clicking
the Info button.
2100.4400.32
- 6.2 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
4. In the network, search for updatable devices by clicking Next.
The devices found will be listed after few seconds.
5. If despite correct network settings no devices are found, the VISA interface is probably
active. If this is the case:
a) Check the settings by clicking Options and, if necessary, deactivate VISA using the
check box.
b) Save the changed settings by clicking Save Options and then search for devices
again by clicking Rescan.
2100.4400.32
- 6.3 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
6. In the Device List, select the device to be updated by enabling the check box.
7. Click Install to start the update.
After the update has been completed, an appropriate message will appear in the field
bottom left in the window. The transmitter is automatically rebooted.
Note
2100.4400.32
If the update is aborted before it has been completed (the message "Copying/Installing
... %" stops before 100% is reached), abort the update by clicking Cancel and then restart the R&S Software Distributor.
- 6.4 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
Backing Up Parameter Data
You can back up the parameter data for the instrument to an external medium and reimport
it whenever necessary.
Local mode using a PC and web browser must be set up for this function.
Select Storage from the browser window.
The start window to save and recall parameter data is displayed.
3.1
Saving Parameter Data on PC
1. In the start window, select Save parameter settings into file.
A window opens from which you can select the parameter data you want to save.
2100.4400.32
- 6.5 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
2. Select the parameter data set you want to save.
3. Enter a unique comment for the selected parameter data set to help you recognize the
content of the parameter data set or its intended use.
4. Click Save.
The parameter data set is transferred to the PC.
5. Click Download saved file here and confirm the subsequent Windows dialog box to
save the parameter data set to a file.
2100.4400.32
- 6.6 -
E-2
Chapter 6
3.2
Maintenance
Loading Parameter Data from PC
ATTENTION!
When you read in parameter data, the current parameters are overwritten without prior
warning.
1. In the start window, select Recall parameter settings into file.
A window appears in which you can select the saved parameter data you want to load.
2. Click Browse and select the required file.
3. Click Upload selected file to load the file.
A confirmation window appears.
2100.4400.32
- 6.7 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
4. Confirm the selected file with Recall.
The parameter data is copied to the transmitter.
2100.4400.32
- 6.8 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
Adjustment of I/Q Modulator
Note
The transmitter must have been in operation for at least 30 minutes before adjustment is
performed (operating temperature).
Objective
If quadrature modulation were optimal (theoretically possible), the residual carrier would be
completely suppressed. In actual practice, however, residual carriers arise (e.g. due to
crosstalk). They must be suppressed using suitable correction carriers.
The objective of I/Q adjustment is to suppress the undesired center carrier and undesired
carrier in the sideband with respect to a test carrier by better than 60 dB.
4.1
Manual Adjustment
Preparation and test carrier measurement
1. Call the TV Settings > RF Out > IQ Adjust menu.
2. Switch on the test signal using the I/Q Testsignal switch.
3. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the RF MONITOR output on the front panel of the transmitter and select the following settings:
2100.4400.32
Center Frequency
Frequency of the vision carrier
Span
6 MHz
Resolution BW
30 kHz
Video BW
300 Hz
Sweep
coupled
- 6.9 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Ref
20 dBm
Att
Maintenance
* RBW 30 kHz
* VBW 300 Hz
SWT 1.9 s
45 dB
20
10
1 AP
CLRWR
-10
-20
EXREF
-30
EXT
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
Center
602 MHz
1 MHz/
Span
10 MHz
Fig. 1 Spectrum analyzer display prior to adjustment
1) Unwanted carrier in sideband at vision carrier frequency +2.5 MHz
2) Unwanted center carrier at vision carrier frequency
3) Desired test carrier at vision carrier frequency -2.5 MHz
Implementation
1. Set the Bias Fine [I/Q] actuators to zero.
2. Course adjustment, center carrier: Using the Bias Coarse [I/Q] actuators, suppress the
undesired center carrier as much as possible with respect to the test carrier. You should
individually adjust each actuator going back and forth several times until you achieve an
optimum value.
3. Sideband adjustment: Use the Gain [I/Q] and Phase actuators to suppress the undesired carrier in the sideband by more than 70 dB with respect to the test carrier. You
should individually adjust each actuator going back and forth several times until you
achieve an optimum value.
4. Course adjustment, center carrier optimization: Using the Bias Coarse [I/Q] actuators,
suppress the undesired center carrier as much as possible with respect to the test carrier. You should individually adjust each actuator going back and forth several times until
you achieve an optimum value.
5. Fine adjustment, center carrier: If the center carrier is suppressed by less than 70 dB,
carry out a fine adjustment using the Bias Fine [I/Q] actuators.
2100.4400.32
- 6.10 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Ref
20 dBm
Att
Maintenance
* RBW 30 kHz
* VBW 300 Hz
SWT 1.9 s
45 dB
20
10
1 AP
CLRWR
-10
-20
EXREF
-30
EXT
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
Center
602 MHz
1 MHz/
Span
10 MHz
Fig. 2 Spectrum analyzer display after the adjustment
6. Use the I/Q Test Signal switch to turn the test signal back off.
2100.4400.32
- 6.11 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
Replacing Fan
WARNING!
For safety reasons the instrument must be powered down when the fan is being replaced .
5.1
Removing Fan
1. Switch off instrument.
2. Loosen and remove the screw from the fan cover.
The fan cover is then only held in place by two tabs on the right-hand side.
3. Swing the fan cover out to the right and remove.
2100.4400.32
- 6.12 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
4. Press the connector locking lever (female X50, FAN) and withdraw the supply cable to
the instrument.
5. Grip the fan shroud at one corner and stretch until the fan can be removed.
2100.4400.32
- 6.13 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
6. Remove the fan.
5.2
Installing Fan
1. Grip the fan shroud at one corner and stretch until the replacement fan can be inserted.
2. Insert the fan so that the type plate faces outward and the power supply cable is at the
bottom left.
In this installation position, the fan extracts air from the inside of the device (the black
arrow on the side of the fan must point toward the outside).
3. Connect the fan to the power supply socket X50 (FAN).
2100.4400.32
- 6.14 -
E-2
Chapter 6
Maintenance
4. Insert the two tabs on the fan cover (right-hand side) into the recesses on the rear panel
of the device and swing the fan cover closed so that it is flush with the rear panel.
When doing so, make sure that the power supply cable does not protrude from the side
of the cover. Do not allow the cable to be pinched.
5. If there are error messages, reset them using the Reset Fault context command.
2100.4400.32
- 6.15 -
E-2
Chapter 6
2100.4400.32
- 6.16 -
Maintenance
E-2
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 7.0 -
E-1
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
CONTENTS
1 Information ....................................................................................... 1
2095.4330.32
- 7.01 -
E-1
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Information
Troubleshooting information will be provided at a later date.
2095.4330.32
- 7.1 -
E-1
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 8
SERVICE
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 8.0 -
E-1
Chapter 8
Service
CONTENTS
1 Information ....................................................................................... 1
2 Replacing Instrument ...................................................................... 2
2.1 Saving Precorrection Curves of Replacement Instrument to PC ..............2
2.2 Changing Memory Card .................................................................................3
2.2.1 Removing Original Memory Card .................................................................3
2.2.2 Inserting Replacement Memory Card ...........................................................4
2.3 Loading Precorrection Curves of Replacement Instrument from PC ........5
2100.4400.32
- 8.01 -
E-1
Chapter 8
2100.4400.32
- 8.02 -
Service
E-1
Chapter 8
Service
Information
The inside of the instrument does not contain any parts that can be repaired by the customer. Service work must be carried out by your local Rohde & Schwarz representative.
To be able to continue transmission if service work should become necessary, it is advisable
to keep one or more replacement instruments to hand. The following section "Replacing Instrument" describes how to quickly make such a replacement instrument ready for operation.
2100.4400.32
- 8.1 -
E-1
Chapter 8
Service
Replacing Instrument
Scenario
The operational instrument is faulty and can be replaced by an available replacement instrument of the same type.
Objective
The settings of the operational instrument are to be transferred to the replacement instrument as quickly and simply as possible.
Necessary measures
Operating software, settings and precorrection curves (factory precorrection and possibly
also manual precorrection) are stored on the memory card (CompactFlash) of the faulty instrument. Since this data is loaded automatically when the instrument is booted, the parameterization can be transferred to the replacement instrument by simply changing the
memory card.
However, if additional measures are not taken, the precorrection curves created individually
for the replacement instrument will be lost when the card is changed. To prevent this, it is
recommended to follow the procedure below:
– Save factory precorrection curves and any manual precorrection curves of the replacement instrument to a PC
– Insert the memory card of the faulty operational instrument into the replacement instrument
– Copy the precorrection curves from the PC back to the replacement instrument
Note
The content of the memory card cannot be read on a PC because the transmitter and PC
use different file systems. If you try to write data to the memory card using a PC, the transmitter will then no longer be able to read the content of the memory card.
2.1
Saving Precorrection Curves of Replacement
Instrument to PC
To allow backups and later recovery (see the section "Loading Precorrection Curves of Replacement Instrument from PC"), you must set up remote operation via a PC and web
browser (see the chapter "Operating").
To do so, connect an Ethernet cable from the replacement instrument to the PC and also
the power cable to the replacement instrument. The cables in the transmitter system must
not be connected until just before the system is put into operation.
2100.4400.32
- 8.2 -
E-1
Chapter 8
Service
Requirements
– The replacement instrument and PC must be connected via Ethernet.
– The IP addresses of the used Ethernet interfaces must be in the same subnet.
– The browser of the PC must be correctly configured.
– The replacement instrument and PC must be switched on.
Note
The necessary measures are described in the section "Remote Operation and Remote
Control" in the chapter "Operation".
Backing up precorrection curves
The Storage function is used to save a parameter data set (download) that contains only
the precorrection curves (see also the section "Saving Parameter Data on PC" in the chapter "Maintenance"):
1. In the browser, log on at the transmitter with Configuration rights.
2. In the Navigator window of the web browser, click the link Storage.
A new browser window opens in which you can select the storage operations.
3. Click the link Save parameter settings into file.
4. Under Save settings from device part, select the list entry All Equalizer.
5. Confirm the selection by clicking the Save button.
6. Call the Download dialog box using the link Download saved file here and save the
parameter data set containing the precorrection curves to the PC.
2.2
Changing Memory Card
To simplify matters, it is assumed below that the memory cards of the faulty operational instrument and the replacement instrument are to be swapped over. The procedure is basically the same for both instruments.
Note
Inserting a memory card back into the faulty instrument is, of course, not necessary at this
time (except for the purpose of providing a complete description of the procedure).
2.2.1
Removing Original Memory Card
Faulty operational instrument and replacement instrument:
ATTENTION!
If the memory card is removed or inserted while the instrument is still in operation, the card
or the stored data can be damaged. Only change the memory card with the instrument
switched off.
1. Make sure that the instrument is switched off. Disconnect the power plug.
2100.4400.32
- 8.3 -
E-1
Chapter 8
Service
2. On the right-hand side of the instrument, remove the cover of the card slot by unscrewing the two Torx screws.
Fig. 1 Removing cover of card slot
3. Pull the memory card out of the slot.
Fig. 2 Removing memory card
2.2.2
Inserting Replacement Memory Card
Faulty operational instrument and replacement instrument:
1. Carefully push the memory card all the way into the card slot.
2. Screw on the cover of the card slot.
2100.4400.32
- 8.4 -
E-1
Chapter 8
2.3
Service
Loading Precorrection Curves of Replacement
Instrument from PC
The Storage function is used to copy the previously saved precorrection curves back to the
transmitter (upload):
1. In the browser, log on at the transmitter with Configuration rights.
2. In the Navigator window of the web browser, click the link Storage.
A new browser window opens in which you can select the storage operations.
3. Click the link Recall parameter settings from file.
4. Under Save settings from device part, select the list entry All Equalizer.
5. Click the Browse button to call the Select File window in the Explorer.
6. Select the previously saved parameter data set containing the precorrection curves and
confirm the selection by clicking the Open button.
7. Click the Upload selected File button.
The browser page that then appears provides information about the contents of the selected file.
8. Check that you have selected the correct file and then click the Recall button to copy
the previously saved precorrection curves back to the transmitter.
2100.4400.32
- 8.5 -
E-1
Chapter 8
2100.4400.32
- 8.6 -
Service
E-1
Broadcasting Division
CHAPTER 9
ANNEX
Printed in Germany
2095.7346.32
- 9.0 -
E-1
Broadcasting Division
Interface Description
TRANSMITTER
Printed in Germany
2098.1190.72
- 9.A -
E-1
Chapter 9
Annex
CONTENTS
1 Interface Description ....................................................................... 1
1.1 Rear-Panel Interfaces .....................................................................................1
1.1.1 Power Feed/Cooling .....................................................................................1
1.1.1.1 X8: AC Power Feed (Option SLX8000B9/SLX8000B11) ................................... 1
1.1.1.2 X8: DC Power Feed (Option SLX8000B10/SLX8000B12) ................................. 2
1.1.1.3 X50: Fan Supply ................................................................................................. 3
1.1.2 Control Interfaces .........................................................................................3
1.1.2.1 ETHERNET REMOTE (X31): Control Interface for Remote Control .................. 3
1.1.2.2 ETHERNET LOCAL (X30): Control Interface for Local Operation ..................... 4
1.1.2.3 TX CONTROL (X32): RF Loop, CAN Bus .......................................................... 4
1.1.3 POWER OUT (X7): RF Output .....................................................................5
1.1.4 Reference Interfaces ....................................................................................5
1.1.4.1 EXT 1 PPS (X23): Second Pulse from External GPS ........................................ 5
1.1.4.2 EXT REF (X24): Reference Input ....................................................................... 5
1.1.4.3 REF OUT (X29): Reference Monitoring ............................................................. 6
1.1.5 DTV Input Interfaces ....................................................................................6
1.1.5.1 TS 1 (X21): Signal Input 1 (Also HP Stream) ..................................................... 6
1.1.5.2 TS 2 (X22): Signal Input 2 (Also LP Stream) ...................................................... 6
1.1.6 ATV Input Interfaces .....................................................................................7
1.1.6.1
1.1.6.2
1.1.6.3
1.1.6.4
1.1.6.5
AUDIO 1 (X27): Analog Audio Input AF1 ........................................................... 7
AUDIO 2 (X28): Analog Audio Input AF2 ........................................................... 7
BTSC (X25): Analog Audio Input to BTSC Standard (M, N) .............................. 7
VF (X20): Analog Video Input ............................................................................. 8
NICAM DATA (X26): Digital Data Input for NICAM 728 ..................................... 8
1.1.7 Interfaces for Options ...................................................................................8
1.1.7.1 RECEIVER (X1): Antenna Input for DVB-T Receiver ......................................... 8
1.1.7.2 RECEIVER AUX (X3): Antenna Input for Second DVB-T Receiver ................... 9
1.1.7.3 GPS ANTENNA (X2): Antenna Input for GPS Receiver .................................... 9
1.2 Front-Panel Interface ......................................................................................9
1.2.1 RF MONITOR (X4): RF Test Output ............................................................9
2100.4400.32
- 9.01 -
E-2
Chapter 9
2100.4400.32
- 9.02 -
Annex
E-2
Chapter 9
Annex
Interface Description
1.1
Rear-Panel Interfaces
1.1.1
Power Feed/Cooling
1.1.1.1
X8: AC Power Feed (Option SLX8000B9/SLX8000B11)
Low-temperature connector
Variants 20/21 (2 W DTV / 5 W DTV / 10 W DTV)
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks 1)
L1
Input
90 V to 265 V AC
I 2.3 A
50 Hz to 60 Hz ±10 %
X8.L
Power supply connection
Input
X8.N
Power supply connection
PE
Input
X8.PE
Power supply connection
1) Max. 180 VA
Variant 30 (25 W DTV / 50 W DTV / 100 W DTV)
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks 1)
L1
Input
90 V to 265 V AC
I 9.0 A
50 Hz to 60 Hz ±10 %
X8.L
Power supply connection
Input
X8.N
Power supply connection
PE
Input
X8.PE
Power supply connection
1) Max. 735 VA (100 W DTV)
2100.4400.32
- 9.1 -
E-2
Chapter 9
Annex
Variant 31 (125 W ATV / 250 W ATV)
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks 1)
L1
Input
for 125 W ATV:
90 V to 265 V AC ± 10%
X8.L
Power supply connection
for 250 W ATV:
100 V to 240 V AC + 10%
I 9.3 A
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Input
X8.N
Power supply connection
PE
Input
X8.PE
Power supply connection
1) Max. 840 VA
1.1.1.2
X8: DC Power Feed (Option SLX8000B10/SLX8000B12)
Variant 20 (2 HU instruments)
Fig. 1 Pin assignment (from top to bottom)
1) Negative, GND (-)
2) Protective conductor (PE)
3) Positive (+)
2100.4400.32
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
Positive
Input
+38 V to +72 V DC
X8.3
Power supply connection
Negative
Input
GND
X8.1
Power supply connection
PE
Input
X8.2
Power supply connection
- 9.2 -
E-2
Chapter 9
Annex
Variant 30 (3 HU instruments)
Fig. 2 Pin assignment
1) Positive (+)
2) Negative, GND (-)
3) Protective conductor (PE)
1.1.1.3
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
Positive
Input
+38 V to +72 V DC
X8.1
Power supply connection,
pin 1
Negative
Input
GND
X8.2
Power supply connection,
pin 2
PE
Input
X8.PE
Power supply connection,
PE conductor pin
Remarks
X50: Fan Supply
Molex, male connector (4-contact)
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
VCC_FAN
Output
+20 V DC to 24 V DC
X50.1
VCC_GND
Bidirect.
0V
X50.2
FAN_SPEED
Input
Open collector
X50.3
NC
X50.4
1.1.2
Control Interfaces
1.1.2.4
ETHERNET REMOTE (X31): Control Interface for Remote Control
RJ45, female connector (8-contact)
2100.4400.32
- 9.3 -
E-2
Chapter 9
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
TD+
Output
Ethernet
X31.1
TD-
Output
Ethernet
X31.2
RD+
Input
Ethernet
X31.3
NC
X31.4
NC
X31.5
RD-
1.1.2.5
Annex
Input
Ethernet
Remarks
X31.6
NC
X31.7
NC
X31.8
ETHERNET LOCAL (X30): Control Interface for Local Operation
RJ45, female connector (8-contact)
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
TX+
Output
Ethernet
X30.1
TX-
Output
Ethernet
X30.2
RX+
Input
Ethernet
X30.3
NC
X30.4
NC
X30.5
RX-
1.1.2.6
Input
Ethernet
Remarks
X30.6
NC
X30.7
NC
X30.8
TX CONTROL (X32): RF Loop, CAN Bus
D-Sub, female connector (9-contact)
2100.4400.32
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
+12 V
Output
+12 V +0.5/-1.5 V
X32.1
Power supply for external
modules (max. 0.5 A)
+12 V
Output
+12 V +0.5/-1.5 V
X32.9
- 9.4 -
E-2
Chapter 9
1.1.3
Annex
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X32.3
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X32.6
CAN_L
Bidirect.
–
X32.2
CAN bus
CAN_H
Bidirect.
–
X32.7
CAN bus
RF_LOOP_P
Output
–
X32.8
Optocoupler
RF_LOOP_N
Bidirect.
0 V floating
X32.4
Ground
+12V_PF
Output
+12 V floating
X32.5
Ri = 1 k (for diagnosis)
POWER OUT (X7): RF Output
N female, 50
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
Power out
Output
For power outputs of
models, refer to
power output table in
chapter "Design and
Characteristics"
X7.1
RF output
Ri = 50
GND
Two way
0V
X7.2
1.1.4
Reference Interfaces
1.1.4.7
EXT 1 PPS (X23): Second Pulse from External GPS
BNC, female connector, 50
1.1.4.8
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
EXT 1 PPS
Input
LVT
X23.1
Ri = 50 for AC
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X23.2
EXT REF (X24): Reference Input
BNC, female connector, 50
2100.4400.32
- 9.5 -
E-2
Chapter 9
1.1.4.9
Annex
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
EXT REF
Input
-5 dBm to 20 dBm
or LVT
X24.1
Reference input for 5 MHz
or 10 MHz
Ri = 50 for AC
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X24.2
REF OUT (X29): Reference Monitoring
BNC, female connector, 50
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
REF OUT
Output
350 mV pp to
450 mV pp
X29.1
Reference frequency or
1 PPS1) (for monitoring
only)
Ri = 50
GND
Bidirect.
X29.2
1) Can be selected using software
1.1.5
DTV Input Interfaces
1.1.5.10
TS 1 (X21): Signal Input 1 (Also HP Stream)
BNC, female connector, 75
1.1.5.11
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
TS1
Input
ASI /
SMPTE310M
X21.1
Ri = 75
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X21.2
TS 2 (X22): Signal Input 2 (Also LP Stream)
BNC, female connector, 75
2100.4400.32
- 9.6 -
E-2
Chapter 9
Annex
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
TS2
Input
ASI /
SMPTE310M
X22.1
Ri = 75
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X22.2
1.1.6
ATV Input Interfaces
1.1.6.12
AUDIO 1 (X27): Analog Audio Input AF1
XLR, female connector
1.1.6.13
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
AF1-
Input
-12 dBu to +12 dBu
X27.1
Ri = 600 / > 10 k
AF1+
Input
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X27.3
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X27.4
X27.2
AUDIO 2 (X28): Analog Audio Input AF2
XLR, female connector
1.1.6.14
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
AF2-
Input
-12 dBu to +12 dBu
X28.1
Ri = 600 / > 10 k
AF2+
Input
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X28.3
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X28.4
X28.2
BTSC (X25): Analog Audio Input to BTSC Standard (M, N)
BNC, female connector, 75
2100.4400.32
- 9.7 -
E-2
Chapter 9
1.1.6.15
Annex
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
BTSC
Input
0.25 Vrms to 2 Vrms
X25.1
Ri = 75
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X25.2
VF (X20): Analog Video Input
BNC, female connector, 75
1.1.6.16
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
VF
Input
0.7/1 V pp ±3 dB
X20.1
Ri = 75
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X20.2
NICAM DATA (X26): Digital Data Input for NICAM 728
BNC, female connector, 50
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
NICAM DATA
Input
1 V pp to 10 V pp
X26.1
Ri = 50 for AC
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X26.2
1.1.7
Interfaces for Options
1.1.7.17
RECEIVER (X1): Antenna Input for DVB-T Receiver
N female, 50
2100.4400.32
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
RECEIVER
Input
-80 dBm to 20 dBm
X1.1
For options:
– Retransmitter
– Monitoring
Ri = 50
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X1.2
- 9.8 -
E-2
Chapter 9
1.1.7.18
Annex
RECEIVER AUX (X3): Antenna Input for Second DVB-T Receiver
N female, 50
1.1.7.19
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
RECEIVER
AUX
Input
-80 dBm to 20 dBm
X3.1
For options:
– Retransmitter AUX
– Monitoring AUX
Ri = 50
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X3.2
GPS ANTENNA (X2): Antenna Input for GPS Receiver
N female connector, 50
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
GPS ANTENNA
Input
Minimum level:
-128 dBm
X2.1
Ri = 50
GND
Bidirect.
0V
X2.2
1.2
Front-Panel Interface
1.2.1
RF MONITOR (X4): RF Test Output
SMA, female, 50
2100.4400.32
Signal name
Direction
Value range
Contact
Remarks
RF MONITOR
Output
Decoupling at amplifier output
Prms approx. 6 dBm
X4.1
Ri = 50
frequency-dependent, not
calibrated
GND
Bidirect.
X4.2
- 9.9 -
E-2
Chapter 9
2100.4400.32
- 9.10 -
Annex
E-2
Broadcasting Division
Drawings and Diagrams
TRANSMITTER
Printed in Germany
2098.1190.72
- 9.B -
E-1
4
A4
SCHALTNETZTEIL 2HE AC
+24V
V+ S+ S- V-
FRONTSEITE
POWER SUPPLY 2RU AC
2100.4000.02
W1N
PE
PE
F1
MAINS
FILTER
LUEFTER
FAN
W43
.1
.1
.1
FAN
.4
Tx CONTROL
X33
.30
A3
A2
2112.6848.00
2100.2007.03
RF BOARD
RF BOARD
.1 .1
W41
X54
X100
2112.4800.03
W29
X29
X32
DUMMY PLUG
8 LOOP+
X21
TS1
X22
TS2
X23
1PPS TTL
X24
X29
EXT REF
REF OUT
.1
X30
.110.110
4 LOOP-
.9
ADTV CODER
.30
LCD DISPLAY
ETHERNET
LOCAL
ETHERNET
REMOTE
.A1
X31
.8
.1
X42
.8
.B6
.1
X1
W12
RF
W13
RF MONITOR
X10
X1
X13
X10
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
.1
.1
W53
X1
A5
LCD DISPLAY
E1
.10
X8
AC 50-60Hz
N 100-230V
max 2.1A at 85V AC
PE
SLX8000B9
W40
FRONT PANEL
X50
X32
X51
A1 X46 B13
.A1 X55 B13
Amplifier CTRL
W21
.A1 X11 B13
A1 X42
A1
VERSTAERKER
AMPLIFIER
2100.1169.02
2100.1175.02
2100.1181.02
X2
RF OUT
W42
*)
B6
A6 *)
SLX8000B13
GPS-EMPFAENGER
SLX8000B42 2W UHF
SLX8000B43 5W UHF
SLX8000B44 10W UHF
.50
W46 *)
2100.3232.02
A1 X46 B13
A8 *)
SLX8000B14
A7 *)
SLX8000B14
2. DVB-T RECEIVER
X1
W3 *)
DVB-T RECEIVER
2100.3355.xx
X1
X2
W2 *)
W1 *)
RUECKSEITE
FRONTSEITE
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 20 2HE DIGITAL mit WECHSELSTROM
Drawing valid for
MOD 20 2RU DIGITAL with AC SUPPLY
*)
X7 POWER OUT
*) = OPTION
REAR PANEL
FRONT PANEL
X3 RECEIVER AUX *)
X1 RECEIVER *)
ANTENNE
X2 GPS
GPS ANTENNA
W7
W146 *)
A1 X46 B13 A1X146 B13
GPS RECEIVER
COMPACT FLASH CARD
(seitlich / at the side)
Benennung / Designat.:
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
7TSK
Name:
Name:
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
1+
2100.1000.01 S
4
FRONTSEITE
DC/DC POWER SUPPLY 2RU
2100.4022.02
W1DC
LUEFTER
FAN
W43
.1
10
.1
.1
FAN
X33
.30
4 LOOPDUMMY PLUG
8 LOOP+
RF BOARD
.1 .1
X54
X100
2112.4800.03
W41
W29
X29
X21
TS1
X22
TS2
X23
1PPS TTL
X24
X29
EXT REF
REF OUT
.1
X30
.110.110
X32
.9
2100.2007.03
RF BOARD
.1
ADTV CODER
A2
2112.6848.00
.4
A3
.30
LCD DISPLAY
ETHERNET
LOCAL
ETHERNET
REMOTE
.8
.B6
.1
W12
RF
X1
W13
RF MONITOR
X13
X10
X2
RF OUT
A1 X46 B13
.A1 X55 B13
Amplifier CTRL
W21
2100.1169.02
2100.1175.02
2100.1181.02
W42
.A1 X11 B13
A1 X42
A1
VERSTAERKER
AMPLIFIER
X10
X1
.A1
X31
.8
.1
X42
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
Tx CONTROL
.1
W53
X1
A5
LCD DISPLAY
E1
.10
X8
- 72V DC
- 38V
2.5A - 5.0A
PE
+1 F1
-3 FILTER
PE
SLX8000B10
W40
FRONT PANEL
X50
+24V
V+ S+ S- V-
+IN
-IN
PE
A4
DC/DC WANDLER 2HE
X32
X51
*)
B6
A6 *)
SLX8000B13
GPS-EMPFAENGER
SLX8000B42 2W UHF
SLX8000B43 5W UHF
SLX8000B44 10W UHF
W46 *)
A1 X46 B13
A8 *)
SLX8000B14
A7 *)
SLX8000B14
2. DVB-T RECEIVER
X1
W3 *)
DVB-T RECEIVER
2100.3355.xx
X1
X2
W2 *)
X3 RECEIVER AUX *)
X1 RECEIVER *)
W1 *)
ANTENNE
X2 GPS
GPS ANTENNA
W7
RUECKSEITE
FRONTSEITE
*)
X7 POWER OUT
Benennung / Designat.:
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 20 2HE DIGITAL mit GLEICHSTROM
Drawing valid for
MOD 20 2RU DIGITAL with DC SUPPLY
*) = OPTION
REAR PANEL
FRONT PANEL
W146 *)
A1 X46 B13 A1X146 B13
GPS RECEIVER
2100.3232.02
.50
COMPACT FLASH CARD
(seitlich / at the side)
SLX8000
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
7TSK
Name:
Name:
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
2+
2100.1000.01 S
2
POWER SUPPLY 3RU AC
2100.4045.02 SLX8000B11
+32V
X5
PE
A4
SCHALTNETZTEIL 3HE AC
W1N
PE
F1
MAINS
FILTER
LUEFTER
FAN
2100.2107.02
W43
.1
.1
W53
X1
A5
LCD DISPLAY
.30
.30
LCD DISPLAY
FAN
.10
X33
.1
.1
X50
1 X1 .10
X3
.4
.1
A3
Tx CONTROL
ADTV CODER
4 LOOP-
2100.2007.03 VAR/MOD30
2100.2007.02 VAR/MOD31
RF BOARD
RF BOARD
X54
X100
2112.4800.03
W41
DUMMY PLUG
8 LOOP+
X21
X22
X23
X24
X29
W29
X29
.1 .1
X32
.9
A2
2112.6848.00
TS1
TS2
1PPS TTL
EXT REF
REF OUT
Nur VAR31
only MOD31
X20 VF
X25 BTSC
X26 NICAM DATA
.1
X30
.110.110
ETHERNET LOCAL
X31
.8
.B6
.1
X10
X1
W12
W13
RF MONITOR
X1
X10
X13
A1 X46 B13
.A1 X55 B13
RF
.A1
X42
.8
.1
Amplifier CTRL
W21
W42
.A1 X11 B13
2100.1252.02
A1
2100.1269.02
VERSTAERKER 2100.1198.02
AMPLIFIER
2100.1200.02
X2
2100.1217.02
RF OUT
A1 X42
SLX8000B35
SLX8000B36
SLX8000B45
SLX8000B46
SLX8000B47
25W VHF
50W VHF
25W UHF
50W UHF
100W UHF
*)
B6
A6 *)
SLX8000B13
GPS-EMPFAENGER
W46 *)
X27
W30
X28
W31
ETHERNET REMOTE
2. DVB-T RECEIVER
X1
W3 *)
DVB-T RECEIVER
2100.3355.xx
X1
X2
W2 *)
FRONT PANEL
COMPACT FLASH CARD
W1 *)
ANTENNE
X2 GPS
GPS ANTENNA
*)
X7 POWER OUT
*) = OPTION
Benennung / Designat.:
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
AUDIO 2
X28
X3 RECEIVER AUX *)
X1 RECEIVER *)
RUECKSEITE
1 GND
2+
3-
A8 *)
SLX8000B14
A7 *)
SLX8000B14
SLX8000
AUDIO 1
(seitlich / at the side)
REAR PANEL
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 30/31 3HE mit WECHSELSTROM
Drawing valid for
MOD 30/31 3RU with AC SUPPLY
1 GND
2+
3-
A1 X46 B13
FRONTSEITE
X27
W146 *)
A1 X46 B13 A1X146 B13
GPS RECEIVER
2100.3232.02
.50
W7
E1
X32
FRONTSEITE
X8
AC 50-60Hz
N 100-230V
max 9.3A at 90V AC
PE
POWER ADAPTOR BOARD
FRONT PANEL
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
X51
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
7TSK
Name:
Name:
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
3+
2100.1000.01 S
2
A4
DC/DC WANDLER 3HE
DC/DC POWER SUPPLY 3RU
SLX8000B12
2100.4068.02
1 X1 .10
.1
X33
A3
Tx CONTROL
ADTV CODER
.4
.1
4 LOOPDUMMY PLUG
8 LOOP+
2100.2007.03 VAR/MOD30
2100.2007.02 VAR/MOD31
X21
X22
X23
X24
X29
A2
2112.6848.00
RF BOARD
RF BOARD
2112.4800.03
W41
W29
X29
.1 .1
X32
.9
X54
X100
TS1
TS2
1PPS TTL
EXT REF
REF OUT
Nur VAR31
only MOD31
X20 VF
X25 BTSC
X26 NICAM DATA
.1
X30
.110.110
ETHERNET LOCAL
.8
.B6
.1
X10
X1
RF
W13
RF MONITOR
X1
A1 X46 B13
.A1 X55 B13
W12
.A1
X31
.8
.1
X42
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
.1
.30
LCD DISPLAY
FAN
.10
.30
36V - 72V DC
25A - 15A
.1
.1
W53
X1
A5
LCD DISPLAY
PE
E1
W43
X8
+ 1
- 2
PE 7
W1DC
X52 +
X53 X51 PE
X50
FRONTSEITE
LUEFTER
FAN
+32V
X3
FRONT PANEL
X32
X51
Amplifier CTRL
W21
X10
.A1 X11 B13
X13
2100.1252.02
A1
2100.1269.02
VERSTAERKER 2100.1198.02
AMPLIFIER
2100.1200.02
X2
2100.1217.02
RF OUT
SLX8000B35
SLX8000B36
SLX8000B45
SLX8000B46
SLX8000B47
W42
A1 X42
25W VHF
50W VHF
25W UHF
50W UHF
100W UHF
*)
B6
A6 *)
SLX8000B13
GPS-EMPFAENGER
W46 *)
X28
W31
2. DVB-T RECEIVER
X1
W3 *)
DVB-T RECEIVER
2100.3355.xx
X1
W1 *)
W2 *)
RUECKSEITE
FRONTSEITE
ETHERNET REMOTE
FRONT PANEL
COMPACT FLASH CARD
ANTENNE
X2 GPS
GPS ANTENNA
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
X7 POWER OUT
7TSK
Name:
Name:
*)
*) = OPTION
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
X3 RECEIVER AUX *)
X1 RECEIVER *)
Benennung / Designat.:
SLX8000
AUDIO 2
(seitlich / at the side)
REAR PANEL
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 30/31 3HE mit GLEICHSTROM
Drawing valid for
MOD 30/31 3RU with DC SUPPLY
1 GND
2+
3-
X28
A1 X46 B13
W7
AUDIO 1
A8 *)
SLX8000B14
A7 *)
SLX8000B14
X2
W30
1 GND
2+
3-
W146 *)
A1 X46 B13 A1X146 B13
GPS RECEIVER
2100.3232.02
.50
X27
X27
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
4+
2100.1000.01 S
2
A4
SCHALTNETZTEIL 3HE AC
POWER SUPPLY 3RU AC
2100.4045.02 SLX8000B11
+32V
X5
PE
W1N
PE
MAINS
FILTER
LUEFTER
FAN
2100.2107.02
W43
.10
Tx CONTROL
.1
.30
W41
A3
.110.110
ADTV CODER DAB
X42
.A1
2100.2007.10
SLX8000B2 75Ohm INPUT
2100.2007.11
SLX8000B3 HIGH IMPEDANCE
X1
X10
Amplifier CTRL
W21
.A1 X11 B13
A1 X42
X13
A1
2100.1252.02
VERSTAERKER
AMPLIFIER
2100.1269.02
X2
5302.3518.02
RF OUT
W42
SLX8000B35 25W VHF
SLX8000B36 50W VHF
SLX8000B37 100W VHF
X50
ETHERNET LOCAL
ETHERNET REMOTE
.8
.50
.A1 X55 B13
RF
ETI1
ETI2
1PPS TTL
EXT REF
REF OUT
.8
.1
X10
X1
W12
COMPACT FLASH CARD
B6
A6 *)
SLX8000B13
GPS-EMPFAENGER
GPS RECEIVER
2100.3232.02
W2 *)
X2
ANTENNE
X2 GPS
GPS ANTENNA
RUECKSEITE
FRONTSEITE
*)
X7 POWER OUT
*) = OPTION
REAR PANEL
FRONT PANEL
Benennung / Designat.:
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 32 3HE mit WECHSELSTROM
Drawing valid for
MOD 32 3HU with AC SUPPLY
(seitlich / at the side)
*)
W7
.1
.B6
EXT. INTERLOCK/CAN BUS
.1
X30
X32
X21
X22
X23
X24
X29
W29
X29
.1 .1
X54
X100
2112.4800.03
DUMMY PLUG
8 LOOP+
.9
RF BOARD
RF BOARD
4 LOOP-
A2
2112.6848.00
W13
.1
.30
LCD DISPLAY
RF MONITOR
.4
.1
W53
X1
A5
LCD DISPLAY
FAN
X33
.1
.1
X32
1 X1 .10
X3
E1
X31
FRONTSEITE
X8
AC 50-60Hz
N 100-230V
max 9.3A at 90V AC
PE
F1
POWER ADAPTOR BOARD
FRONT PANEL
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
X51
SLX8000
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
7TSK
Name:
Name:
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
5+
2100.1000.01 S
2
A4
DC/DC WANDLER 3HE
DC/DC POWER SUPPLY 3RU
SLX8000B12
2100.4068.02
.1
.30
DUMMY PLUG
8 LOOP+
W41
X42
X30
ADTV CODER DAB
.A1
2100.2007.10
SLX8000B2 75Ohm INPUT
2100.2007.11
SLX8000B3 HIGH IMPEDANCE
X1
Amplifier CTRL
W21
X10
.A1 X11 B13
X13
A1 X42
2100.1252.02
A1
VERSTAERKER 2100.1269.02
SLX8000B35 25W VHF
5302.3518.02
SLX8000B37 100W VHF
AMPLIFIER
X2
RF OUT
W42
SLX8000B36 50W VHF
ETHERNET LOCAL
ETHERNET REMOTE
COMPACT FLASH CARD
B6
A6 *)
SLX8000B13
GPS-EMPFAENGER
GPS RECEIVER
2100.3232.02
W2 *)
X2
ANTENNE
X2 GPS
GPS ANTENNA
*)
X7 POWER OUT
*) = OPTION
RUECKSEITE
FRONT PANEL
REAR PANEL
Benennung / Designat.:
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 32 3HE mit GLEICHSTROM
Drawing valid for
MOD 32 3HU with DC SUPPLY
(seitlich / at the side)
*)
W7
FRONTSEITE
.8
.50
.A1 X55 B13
RF
ETI1
ETI2
1PPS TTL
EXT REF
REF OUT
.8
.1
X10
X1
W12
.1
.B6
EXT. INTERLOCK/CAN BUS
.1
A3
.110.110
X32
X21
X22
X23
X24
X29
W29
X29
.1 .1
X54
X100
2112.4800.03
4 LOOP-
A2
RF BOARD
RF BOARD
.1
SLX8000B2
SLX8000B3
.30
2112.6848.00
W13
.4
.9
X33
X1
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
FAN
.10
W53
LCD DISPLAY
RF MONITOR
.1
.1
Tx CONTROL
36V - 72V DC
25A - 15A
X50
1 X1 .10
.1
A5
LCD DISPLAY
PE
E1
W43
X8
+ 1
- 2
PE 7
W1DC
X52 +
X53 X51 PE
X31
FRONTSEITE
LUEFTER
FAN
+32V
X3
FRONT PANEL
X32
X51
SLX8000
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
7TSK
Name:
Name:
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
6+
2100.1000.01 S
A23
SCHALTNETZTEIL 1000W, 32V
A24
SCHALTNETZTEIL 1000W, 32V
2100.1417.00
2100.1417.00
X4
X1
.10
PWR Status/
Curr-Share
X3
X6
.12
W21
X6
.12
X1
.10
X3
W19
.1
X1
A21 *)
.1
.1
SLX8000B1 X2
KOND.-BATT.
*) .10 CAPAC.-BATT. .10
32V5302.3901.02
W10
*)
24V-
.30
A3
ADTV CODER DAB
RF BOARD
2112.4800.03
W6
2100.2007.10
SLX8000B2 75Ohm INPUT
2100.2007.11
SLX8000B3 HIGH IMPEDANCE
.1 .1
.110.110 .A1
RF
W17
X20
X13
X29
.A1 X55 B13
.A1
X23
EXT PPS
X24
X29
EXT REF
REF Monitor
ETHERNET
LOCAL
.8
ETHERNET
REMOTE
.1 X10 .50
COMPACT FLASH CARD
Amplifier CTRL
W16
X10
ETI2
X31
W29
X1
W15
X22
.1
.B6
ETI1
X30
X46
X42
DC: 32V/29A
X21
.8
.A1
DC: 32V/29A
.1
.B13
DUMMY PLUG
8 LOOP+
EXT. INTERLOCK/CAN BUS
A2
RF BOARD
X4
X32
.9
.30
2112.6848.00
RF MONITOR
4 LOOP-
X33
X1
.1
.10
W53
LUEFTER
.4
.1
LCD DISPLAY
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
.1
32V-
.1
A5
LCD DISPLAY
RUECKSEITE
W10
A26
POWER ADAPTER BOARD
.1
5302.3860.02 .1
32V-
REAR PANEL
X4
POWER ADAPTER BOARD
.1
5302.3860.02 .1
FRONT PANEL
X50
A25
POWER SUPPLY 1000W,32V
POWER SUPPLY 1000W,32V
FRONTSEITE
X32
X51
X54
X100
W42 *)
.A1 X42 B6
B13 X11
A6 *)
X2
SLX8000B13
GPS-EMPFAENGER
A1
VERSTAERKER
AMPLIFIER
W2 *)
X2 GPS ANTENNE
2100.3232.02
5302.4008.02 SLX8000B38 200W VHF
GPS ANTENNA
GPS RECEIVER
RUECKSEITE
REAR PANEL
FRONTSEITE
*) OPTION
FRONT PANEL
Benennung / Designat.:
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 42
Drawing valid for
MOD 42
SLX8000
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
7TSK
Name:
Name:
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
7+
2100.1000.01 S
1
RUECKSEITE
REAR PANEL
X50
A3
NETZTEIL 4HE AC
POWER SUPPLY 4HU AC
ADTV CODER DAB
5302.4202.02 SLX8000B8
2100.2007.10 SLX8000B2 75Ohm INPUT
A23
SCHALTNETZTEIL 1000W, 32V
2100.2007.11 SLX8000B3 HIGH IMPEDANCE
POWER SUPPLY 1000W,32V
W22
2100.1417.00
PE
LUEFTER FAN
0730.9131.00
W4
E2
(sw)
W3 (sw)
F2
(gnge)
FUSE 10A
KLEMMLEISTE
X4
A26
(or)
(or)
2100.1417.00
X18
F1
230V/240V AC
.2
.1 X4
POWER SUPPLY 1000W,32V
FUSE 10A
W1
POWER ADAPTER BOARD
5302.3860.02
.3
A24
SCHALTNETZTEIL 1000W, 32V
LUEFTER FAN
0730.9131.00
X8
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
E1
(sw)
(or)
(gnge)
X4
A25
POWER ADAPTER BOARD
5302.3860.02
.3
(sw)
(or)
PE
(gnge)
.2
.1 X4
W5
GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
A1
VERSTAERKER
W1: Netzkabel 1
(power cable
W3: Netzkabel 2
(power cable
W4/W5: Netzkabel
(power cable
AMPLIFIER
5302.4002.02 SLX8000B38 200W VHF
RF Power X7
1)
2)
3)
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 42 mit 230/240V AC NETZEINGANG
Drawing valid for
MOD 42 with 230/240V AC POWER INPUT
RUECKSEITE
Benennung / Designat.:
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
REAR PANEL
SLX8000
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
7TSK
Name:
Name:
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
8+
2100.1000.01 S
1
RUECKSEITE
X50
REAR PANEL
A3
NETZTEIL 4HE AC
POWER SUPPLY 4HU AC
ADTV CODER DAB
5302.4202.03 SLX8000B7
2100.2007.10 SLX8000B2 75Ohm INPUT
A23
SCHALTNETZTEIL 1000W, 32V
2100.2007.11 SLX8000B3 HIGH IMPEDANCE
POWER SUPPLY 1000W,32V
W22
A25
PE
LUEFTER FAN
0730.9131.00
.2
.1 X4
POWER SUPPLY 1000W,32V
2100.1417.00
FUSE 12A (UL)
W1 (sw)
120V AC
.3
FUSE 12A (UL)
F3
(sw)
PE
(bl)
F2
FUSE 12A (UL)
.PE
A26
(sw)
F1
(sw)
(bl)
A24
SCHALTNETZTEIL 1000W, 32V
LUEFTER FAN
0730.9131.00
.1
X4
POWER ADAPTER BOARD
.3
5302.3860.02
(bl)
(sw)
(gnge)
W4
E2
X8
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
For this document all rights are reserved
E1
2100.1417.00
(bl)
F4
(bl)
X4
POWER ADAPTER BOARD
5302.3860.02
.3
(bl)
(sw)
(gnge)
.2
.1 X4
W5
FUSE 12A (UL)
GEHAEUSE (gnge)
HOUSING
A1
VERSTAERKER
W1: Netzkabel 1 - 120V
(power cable 1)
W4/W5: Netzkabel 2 - 120V
(power cable 2)
AMPLIFIER
5302.4002.02 SLX8000B38 200W VHF
RF Power X7
Darstellung gueltig fuer VAR 42
Drawing valid for
MOD 42
mit 120V AC NETZEINGANG
with 120V AC POWER INPUT
Benennung / Designat.:
ROHDE&SCHWARZ SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
RUECKSEITE
REAR PANEL
SLX8000
Datum:
Date:
08-09-01
Abteilung:
Dept.:
7TSK
Name:
Name:
borrmann
Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.:
de
20.00
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
Blatt:/Sh.:
9-
2100.1000.01 S
el.Kennz
Part
Benennung / Hinweise
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Hersteller
Manufacturer
Bestellbezeichnung
Designation
enthalten in
contained in
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
ACHTUNG EGB /ATTENTION ESD
*VARIANTENERKLAERUNG
*EXPLANATION OF MODELS
VAR20=SLX8000 GRUNDGERAET
2HE DIGITAL
MOD20=
VAR21=SLX8000 GRUNDGERAET
2HE ANALOG/DIGITAL
MOD21=SLX8000 BASIC UNIT 2HU
ANALOG/DIGITAL
VAR30=SLX8000 GRUNDGERAET
3HE DIGITAL
MOD30=
VAR31=SLX8000 GRUNDGERAET
3HE ANALOG/DIGITAL
MOD31=SLX8000 BASIC UNIT 3HU
ANALOG/DIGITAL
VAR32=SLX8000 GRUNDGERAET
3HE DAB
MOD32=
VAR40=SLX8000 GRUNDGERAET
4HE DIGITAL
MOD40=
VAR41=SLX8000 GRUNDGERAET
4HE ANALOG/DIGITAL
MOD41=
VAR42=SLX8000 GRUNDGERAET
4HE DAB
MOD42=
A2
ED RF BOARD
RF BOARD
2112.4800.03
2100.1000.01
A3
ED ADTV CODER
ADTV CODER
VAR 20 30 40
2100.2007.03
2100.1000.01
A3
ED ADTV CODER
ADTV CODER
VAR 21 31 41
2100.2007.02
2100.1000.01
A3
ED ADTV CODER
ADTV CODER
VAR 32 42
enthalten in 5302.4408.02
SLX8000B2
2100.2007.10
2100.1000.01
A3
ED ADTV CODER
ADTV CODER
VAR 32 42
enthalten in 5302.4414.02
SLX8000B3
2100.2007.11
2100.1000.01
A5
ND DISPLAY LCD 200X48-8T/5LED
2112.6848.00
DATA_MODUL
DISPLAY LCD
200X48-8T/5LED (LCM
164-02)
2100.1000.01
2100.1469.00
PAPST
8314H/2 R&SZCHNG.2100.1469.00
AEZ.01.00
2100.1000.01
2100.1481.00
PAPST
DV4114N/2 R&SZCHNG.2100.1481.00
AEZ.02.
2100.1000.01
DISPLAY LCD 200X48-8KEYS/5LED
E1
EV 80X80X32 22.0L/S 24V
BLOWER
VAR 20 21
E1
EV 119X119X38 76L/S 24V
FAN 119X119X38
VAR 30 31 32
Benennung/Designation
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2009-10-29
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Name /
Name
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
45.00
Blatt/Sheet
1 of 2
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
HG
2100.1000.01 SA
el.Kennz
Part
Benennung / Hinweise
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Hersteller
Manufacturer
Bestellbezeichnung
Designation
enthalten in
contained in
E1 - E2
EV 119X119X38 50L/S 24VBLOWER 24V 50L/S
VAR 40 41 42
0730.9131.00
PAPST
4184NX 9294310103
2100.1000.01
W12
DV RF KABEL EF316D SMP/WSMA/W
RF CABLE
VAR 20 21 30 31 40 41
2100.1830.00
2100.1000.01
W13
DV RF KABEL EF316D SMP/WSMA/E
RF CABLE
VAR 20 21 30 31 40 41
2100.1846.00
2100.1000.01
W22
DX DC-KABEL LUEFTER
DC CABLE FAN
VAR 40 41 42
5302.3899.00
2100.1000.01
W29
DV RF KABEL EF316D SMP/WBNC/E
RF CABLE
VAR 20 21 30 31 32 40 41 42
2100.1817.00
2100.1000.01
W31
DX AF KABEL
AF CABLE
VAR 21 31
2100.1930.00
2100.1000.01
W31
DX AF KABEL 4HE
AF CABLE 4RU
VAR 41
2104.1805.00
2100.1000.01
W32
DX AF KABEL
AF CABLE
VAR 21 31
2100.1930.00
2100.1000.01
W53
DF FLEX-STRIP 30P. R=0.5 L=400
2112.6790.00
SUMITUMO
SML2CD-30X390ADX8(BL)-90.5-S5-MN(35)F
5302.4037.00
SUMITUMO
SML2CD30X550-ADX6(BL)- 2100.1000.01
P0,5-S4-M(35)-F
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
2100.1000.01
FLEX-STRIP 30P. R=0.5 L=400
VAR 20 21 30 31 32
W53
DF FLEX-STRIP 30P. R=0.5 L=550
FLEX-STRIP 30P. R=0.5 L=550
VAR 40 41 42
X32
DX BLINDSTECKER X6
DUMMY PLUG X6
dem Geraet beiliegend
2098.9810.00
2100.1000.01
Benennung/Designation
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000 LOW POWER TRANSMITTER
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2009-10-29
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Name /
Name
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
45.00
Blatt/Sheet
2 of 2
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
HG
2100.1000.01 SA
Broadcasting Division
Spare Parts Lists
TRANSMITTER
Printed in Germany
2098.1190.72
- 9.C -
E-1
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
ACHTUNG EGB/ATTENTION ESD
*VARIANTENERKLAERUNG
*EXPLANATION OF MODELS
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
VAR20=GRUNDGERAET 2HE DIGITAL
MOD20=BASIC MODEL 2HU DIGITAL
VAR21=GRUNDGERAET 2HE DIGITAL
MOD21=BASIC MODEL 2HU DIGITAL
VAR30=GRUNDGERAET 3HE DIGITAL
MOD30=BASIC MODEL 3HU DIGITAL
VAR31=GRUNDGERAET 3HE ANALOG
MOD31=BASIC MODEL 3HU ANALOG
VAR32=GRUNDGERAET 3HE DAB
MOD32=BASIC MODEL 3HU DAB
VAR40=GRUNDGERAET 4HE DIGITAL
MOD40=BASIC MODEL 4HU DIGITAL
VAR41=GRUNDGERAET 4HE ANALOG
MOD41=BASIC MODEL 4HU ANALOG
VAR42=GRUNDGERAET 4HE DAB
MOD42=BASIC MODEL 4HU DAB
40 1
KR BW2-FRONTGRIFF 2E
FRONT HANDLE
VAR 20 21
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
1096.1468.00
42 1
KR BW2-GESTELLWINK.2E RE.
ANGLE
VAR 20 21
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
1096.3425.00
43 1
KR BW2-GESTELLWINK.2E LI.
ANGLE LEFT
VAR 20 21
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
1096.3431.00
50 1
KR BW2-FRONTGRIFF 3E
FRONT HANDLE
VAR 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
1096.1474.00
55 1
KR BW2-GESTELLWINKEL 3E
ANGLE
VAR 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
1096.3448.00
60 1
KR BW2-FRONTGRIFF 4E
FRONT HANDLE
VAR 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
1096.1480.00
65 1
MZ BW2-GESTELLWINKEL 4E
ANGLE
VAR 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
1096.3454.00
80 1
KR BW2-GLEITSCHIENE
RAIL
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
1096.3677.00
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
1 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
150 1
A3
ED ADTV CODER
ADTV CODER
VAR 21 31
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.2007.02
160 1
A3
ED ADTV CODER
ADTV CODER
VAR 20 30
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.2007.03
170 1
A3
ED ADTV CODER
ADTV CODER
VAR 32 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
##SLx8000B2
2100.2007.10
172 1
A3
ED ADTV CODER
ADTV CODER
VAR 32 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
##SLx8000B3
2100.2007.11
180 1
A2
ED RF BOARD
RF BOARD
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2112.4800.03
190 1
W13
DV RF KABEL EF316D SMP/W-SMA/E
RF CABLE
VAR 20 21 30 31
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1846.00
195 1
W31
DX AF KABEL
AF CABLE
VAR 21 31
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1930.00
2100.1817.00
2100.1469.00
2100.1430.00
2100.1717.00
W32
200 1
W29
DV RF KABEL EF316D SMP/W-BNC/E
RF CABLE
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
210 1
E1
EV 80X80X32 22.0L/S 24V
BLOWER
VAR 20 21
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
215 1
EV LUEFTERMANS. 80X80X5
FAN SLEEVE 80X80
VAR 20 21
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
220 1
MZ LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
T=1.5-2.5
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
2 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
VAR 20 21
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
230 1
240 1
E1
EV 119X119X38 76L/S 24V
FAN 119X119X38
VAR 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1481.00
EV LUEFTERMANS. PAPST DV4114
T=1.5-2.5
FAN SLEEVE PAPST DV4114
VAR 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1498.00
245 1
MZ LUEFTERHAUBE 3HE
00COVER FAN
VAR 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1598.00
250 1
EV 119X119X38 50L/S 24VBLOWER 24V 50L/S
VAR 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
0730.9131.00
E1
E2
255 1
EV LUEFTERMANS. 119X119X6 T=1.5-2.5
FAN SLEEVE 119X119
VAR 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1446.00
260 1
EV SCHUTZGITTER 119X119 KLEIN
GUARD GRILL 119X119 SMALL
VAR 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
5301.0415.00
265 1
WV 2KO-KLEB UHU-PLUS ENDF
DUAL CO-ORDINATE-GLUE
VAR 42
zur Befestigung von Pos. 260
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
0016.8712.00
270 1
ND DISPLAY LCD 200X48-8T/5LED
DISPLAY LCD 200X48-8KEYS/5LED
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2112.6848.00
271 1
MZ DISPLAY DICHTMATTE
CONDUCTIVE FOAM
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1330.00
272 1
SF SCHALTMATTE SFE100
PUSH-BUTTON BOARD SFE100
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2112.6831.00
A5
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
3 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
_
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
273 1
MT ABSCHIRMUNG LED
COVER
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.3884.00
274 1
MZ DRUCKPLATTE
PLATE
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2112.5329.00
276 1
OP MESH-SCHEIBE 102.9X30X2 ACRYL A3
SCREENED FILTER GLASS
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2112.2413.00
282 1
W53
DF FLEX-STRIP 30P. R=0.5 L=400
FLEX-STRIP 30P. R=0.5 L=400
VAR 20 21 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2112.6790.00
284 1
W53
DF FLEX-STRIP 30P. R=0.5 L=550
FLEX-STRIP 30P. R=0.5 L=550
VAR 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
5302.4037.00
286 1
ZN FRONTPLATTE 2HE BEDRUCKT
COVER
VAR 20 21
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1675.00
288 1
ZN FRONTHAUBE 3HE BEDRUCKT
PRINTED
VAR 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1523.00
290 1
KB FRONTHAUBE 4HE BEDRUCKT
FRONT COVER 4HU PRINTED
VAR 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
5302.3760.00
292 1
DX DC-KABEL LUEFTER
DC CABLE FAN
VAR 42
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
5302.3899.00
295 1
MZ ABDECKUNG
COVER
VAR 20 30 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1552.00
298 1
MB MASSEBOLZEN
GROUND BOLT
VAR 20 21 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
5301.0215.00
300 1
2098.9810.00
W22
X32
DX BLINDSTECKER X6
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
4 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
DUMMY PLUG X6
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
500 0
NM COMPACTFLASH 256MB TOSHIBA
256MB COMPACT FLASH CARD
## ersetzt durch Pos. 501
2095.8788.00
501 1
NM COMPACTFLASH 1GB TOSHIBA
1GB COMPACT FLASH
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
0041.8535.00
510 1
MZ FLASHCARDABDECKUNG
COVER FOR FLASH
VAR 20 21 30 31 32
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
2100.1698.00
520 1
MZ ABDECKUNG BNC-BU
COVER
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
5302.4137.00
530 1
MP ABDECKKAPPE RD15.9
COVER RD 15.9
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1000.01
## SLx8000 Grundgerät
0009.9200.00
1000 0
PB BEMERKUNG
NOTE
VERSTAERKERKOMPONENTEN
0999.9610.00
1010 1
A1
GG SLX8000B42 VERSTAERKER 2W UHF
SLX8000B42 AMPLIFIER 2W UHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1169.02
1025 1
A1
GG SLX8000B43 VERSTAERKER 5W UHF
SLX8000B43 AMPLIFIER 5W UHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1175.02
1030 1
A1
GG SLX8000B44 VERSTAERKER 10W UHF
SLX8000B44 AMPLIFIER 10W UHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1181.02
1040 1
DV RF KABEL EF316D SMP/W-N/E
RF CABLE
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1169.01 Option SLx8000B42
## 2100.1181.01 Option SLx8000B44
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1823.00
1045 1
A1
GG SLX8000B45 VERSTAERKER 25W UHF
SLX8000B45 AMPLIFIER 25W UHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K30 K31
2100.1198.02
1050 1
A1
GG SLX8000B46 VERSTAERKER 50W UHF
SLX8000B46 AMPLIFIER 50W UHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K30 K31
2100.1200.02
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
5 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
_
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
1060 1
W7
DW RF OUT KABEL
RF OUT CABLE
## Verwendet in:
## 2100.1200.01 Option SLx8000B46
## 2100.1269.01 Option SLx8000B36
## 2100.1217.01 Option SLx8000B47
## 5302.3518.01 Option SLx8000B37
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
2100.1946.00
1065 1
A1
GG SLX8000B35 VERSTAERKER 25W VHF
BD.3
SLX8000B35 AMPLIFIER 25W VHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K30 K31K32
2100.1252.02
1070 1
A1
GG SLX8000B36 VERSTAERKER 50W VHF
BD.3
SLX8000B36 AMPLIFIER 50W VHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K30 K31K32
2100.1269.02
1080 1
A1
GG SLX8000B47 VERSTAERKER 100W
UHF
SLX8000B47 AMPLIFIER 100W UHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K30 K31
2100.1217.02
1090 1
A1
GG SLX8000B37 VERSTAERKER 100W
VHF BD.3
SLX8000B37 AMPLIFIER 100W VHF
## Option Verstärker
## abgeglichen und geprüft
## verwendet in K30 K31K32
5302.3518.02
1100 0
PB BEMERKUNG
NOTE
Verstärkerbauteile nur für Zentralservice, da
unzureichende Prüftiefe
1110 1
ED UHF-VERSTAERKER 2W LP3
UHF-AMPLIFIER 2W LP3
## verwendet in K20 K21
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
1120 1
1140 1
VH
0999.9610.00
2100.2636.02
ED 10W UHF-VERSTAERKER
10W AMPLIFIER
## verwendet in K20 K21
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
2100.2859.02
ED UHF-VERSTAERKER 50W
UHF-AMPLIFIER 50W
## verwendet in K30 K31
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
2100.2959.02
1150 1
AL BLF861A GEBOGEN
BLF861A BENT
## verwendet in K30 K31
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
2087.6138.00
1160 1
RT 50R 250W ABSCHL.-R FL
TERMINATING RESISTOR 50R 250W
## verwendet in K30 K31
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
2090.2700.00
1170 1
AL BLF872 N-E 300W LDMOS
UHF POWER TRANSISTOR
## verwendet in K30 K31
2100.6448.00
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
6 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
1180 1
ED UHF-VERSTAERKER 100W
UHF-AMPLIFIER 100W
## verwendet in K30 K31
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
2100.3055.02
1185 1
ED UHF-VERSTAERKER 50W
UHF-AMPLIFIER 50W
## verwendet in K30 K31
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
2100.2959.02
1190 1
ED VHF-VERSTAERKER 50W
VHF-AMPLIFIER 50W
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
2100.3155.02
1192 1
ED VHF-VERSTAERKER 100W
VHF AMPLIFIER 100W
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
5302.3530.02
1194 1
AL MRF9030LR1 RF POWER FET
RF POWER FET
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
2095.6127.00
1196 1
AL D1029UK 350W DMOSFET
DMOS RF FET
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
## nur für Zentralservice
## da unzureichende Prüftiefe
5003.8585.00
1200 1
ED VHF-VERSTAERKER 200W
VHF AMPLIFIER 200W
## Verwendet in:
## Option Verstärker VM8200A1
## 5302.3601.01
## verwendet in K42
5302.3630.02
1210 1
2088.6448.00
V11A
AL D1029UK-RS (10 STUCK) 350W
DMOSFET
GAIN-SELECTED DMOS RF FET
## Verwendet in:
## Option Verstärker VM8200A1
## 5302.3601.01
## verwendet in K42
V12A
V13A
V14A
1220 1
V301
ZM TRANSISTORAUFBAU
TRANSISTOR KIT
## Verwendet in:
## Option Verstärker VM8200A1
## 5302.3601.01
## Option Verstärker VM8100A1
## 5302.3501.01
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32 K42
5302.3930.00
DH HF-KABEL MONITOR
RF CABLE MONITOR
## Verwendet in:
## Option SLx8000B38
## 5302.4008.01
## verwendet in K42
5302.3953.00
V302
1230 1
2000 0
W17
PB BEMERKUNG
0999.9610.00
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
7 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
NOTE
NETZTEILKOMPONENTEN
2010 1
F1
FN NETZFILTER M.SCH.U.SI.3A
CONNECTOR
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B9
## 2100.4000.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.3610.00
2020 1
F1.1
SS SCHMELZ. T3.15H IEC60127/V
TIME LAG FUSE
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B9
## 2100.4000.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
0099.6729.00
2030 1
A4
NJ NETZTEIL 24V/6.5A
POWER SUPPLY
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B9
## 2100.4000.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
4065.8599.00
2040 1
MZ NETZFILTERABSCHIRMUNG
CONDUCTIVE FOAM
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B9
## 2100.4000.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1600.00
2045 1
MZ NETZFILTERABDICHTUNG
HOLDER
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B9
## 2100.4000.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1723.00
2050 1
W1N
DX NETZKABEL W1N
MAIN CABLE
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B9
## 2100.4000.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1952.00
2080 1
F1
FN DC-STECKER MIT FILTER
DC-POWERPLUG WITH FILTER
## Verwendet in
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B10
## 2100.4022.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.3690.00
2090 1
A4
NJ DC/DC-WANDLER FUER LP3
DC/DC-POWER SUPPLY
## Verwendet in
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B10
## 2100.4022.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.3684.00
2100 1
MZ NETZFILTERABSCHIRMUNG
CONDUCTIVE FOAM
## Verwendet in
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B10
## 2100.4022.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2104.1505.00
2110 1
MZ STECKERHALTER DC
SUPPORT
## Verwendet in
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B10
## 2100.4022.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1798.00
2120 1
2100.1923.00
W1DC
DX W1DC INPUT KAB. 2HE
DC CABLE
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
8 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
## Verwendet in
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B10
## 2100.4022.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2130 1
OS SCHILD NETZFILTER 2HE
LABEL
## Verwendet in
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B10
## 2100.4022.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.1769.00
2140 1
X-X8
FP GEHAEUSE 3POL. MATE-N-LOCK
HOUSING 3CIRCUIT MATE-N-LOCK
## Verwendet in
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B10
## 2100.4022.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.3726.00
2150 3
X-X8
FP BUCHSENKONT.0.5-2.1QMM
SOCKET CONTACT
## Verwendet in
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B10
## 2100.4022.01
## verwendet in K20 K21
0343.4946.00
2200 1
F1
FN GERAETESTECKER 10A
CONNECTOR
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B11
## 2100.4045.01
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
2100.3626.00
2210 1
F1.1
SS SCHMELZS.T10 IEC60127-2/V
TIME LAG FUSE T10
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B11
## 2100.4045.01
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
0606.3136.00
2220 1
A4
NJ AC/DC-NETZTTEIL 1000W 32V
AC/DC POWER SUPPLY
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B11
## 2100.4045.01
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B8
## 5302.4208.01
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
## verwendet in K42
2100.1417.00
A23
A24
2230 1
A4A
ED POWER ADAPTERBOARD 1KW
POWER ADAPTERBOARD 1KW
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B11
## 2100.4045.01
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
2100.2107.02
2240 1
W1N
DX NETZKAB. 3HE W1N
MAINS CABLE
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B11
## 2100.4045.01
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
2100.1969.00
2270 1
3584.1694.00
LK KLAPPKERN SW 7.5-8.5MM
HINGED FERRITE CORE
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
9 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
_
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
2100.2207.02
VH
2280 1
ED DC-DC WANDLER 48/32V
DC-DC CONVERTER 48/32V
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
2290 1
EV 40X40X25 5.00L/S 12V
BLOWER
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
2100.2236.00
2292 1
MZ ADAPTERBLECH DC
AD SHROUT
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
2100.1781.00
2294 1
2100.1917.00
2296 1
OS BESCHRIFTUNG DC NETZEINGANG
LABEL
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
2100.3832.00
2298 1
X-X8
FO BUCHSENTRAEGER 6POL+E
CONTACT-HOLDER
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
6058.8860.00
2300 1
X-X8
FO BUCHSENKONTAKT B F.35A
CONTACT
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
6058.8883.00
2302 1
X-X8
FO STIFTKONTAKT B
CONNECTOR
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
6058.8877.00
2304 1
X-X8
FO KAB.STECKER M.ZUGENTL.
CONNECTOR
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
6058.8848.00
2310 1
X8
FN GERAETEST. 2POL.+SCHU.
RECEPTACLE
## Verwendet in:
## Netzeingang X8
## 5302.4220.01
## beinhaltet in Option SLx8000B8
## 5302.4208.01
## verwendet in K42
0092.3930.00
2320 1
A25
ED POWER ADAPTERBOARD 1KW
POWER ADAPTERBOARD 1KW
## Verwendet in:
5302.3860.02
W1DC
DX DC-EINGANGSKABEL
DC INPUT CABLE
## Verwendet in:
## Option Netzteil SLx8000B12
## 2100.4068.01
## verwendet in K30 K31
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
10 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
## Option SLx8000B8
## 5302.4208.01
## verwendet in K42
A26
2330 1
F1
SS SCHMELZS.T8 IEC127-2/V
FUSE
## Verwendet in:
## Netzeingang X8
## 5302.4220.01
## beinhaltet in Option SLx8000B8
## 5302.4208.01
## verwendet in K42
0359.3615.00
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
F2
2500 0
PB BEMERKUNG
NOTE
Option Luftfilter; Luftfiltermatten
0999.9610.00
2510 1
MZ FILTERMATTE 2HE LINKS
FILTER MAT
## Verwendet in
## Option Luftfilter SLx8000B22
## 2100.3803.02
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.3755.00
2520 1
MZ FILTERMATTE 2HE RECHTS
FILTER MAT
## Verwendet in
## Option Luftfilter SLx8000B22
## 2100.3803.02
## verwendet in K20 K21
2100.3761.00
2530 1
MZ FILTERMATTE 3HE LINKS
FILTER MAT
## Verwendet in
## Option Luftfilter SLx8000B23
## 2100.3803.03
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
2100.3778.00
2540 1
MZ FILTERMATTE 3HE RECHTS U
FILTER MAT
## Verwendet in
## Option Luftfilter SLx8000B23
## 2100.3803.03
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
2100.3784.00
2550 1
MZ FILTERMATTE 3HE RECHTS O
FILTER MAT
## Verwendet in
## Option Luftfilter SLx8000B23
## 2100.3803.03
## verwendet in K30 K31 K32
2100.3790.00
2560 1
MZ FILTERMATTE 4HE LINKS
FILTER MAT
## Verwendet in
## Option Luftfilter SLx8000B24
## 2100.3803.04
## verwendet in K42
5302.4108.00
2570 1
MZ FILTERMATTE 4HE RECHTS
FILTER MAT
## Verwendet in
## Option Luftfilter SLx8000B24
## 2100.3803.04
## verwendet in K42
5302.4114.00
2580 0
PB BEMERKUNG
NOTE
Option GPS-Empfaenger
0999.9610.00
2590 1
ED GPS-EMPFAENGER
GPS RECEIVER
## Verwendet in:
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
2100.3255.02
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
11 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Pos.-Nr.
ItemNo
Menge
Quantity
ME
Unit
El.Kennz
Ref.Des.
Benennung / Bezeichnung
Designation
Sachnummer
Stock No.
Ersatzteil
Subst.part
BA
VH
## Option GPS SLx8000B13
## 2100.3232.01
## verwendet in K20 K21 K30 K31 K32 K42
W2
DV RF KABEL EF316D SMP/W-N/E
RF CABLE
## Verwendet in:
## Option GPS SLx8000B13
## 2100.3232.01
## verwendet in K20 K21 K30 K31 K32 K42
2690 0
PB BEMERKUNG
NOTE
Option DVB-T/H Receiver
2700 1
ED DVB-T/H RECEIVER
DVB-T/H RECEIVER
## Verwendet in:
## Option DVB-T/H Retransmitter
SLx8000B14
## Option DVB-T/H Monitoring SLx8000B15
## 2100.3355.01
## verwendet in K20 K21 K30 K31
2100.3403.02
2710 1
DV RF KABEL EF316D SMP/W-N/E
RF CABLE
## Verwendet in:
## Option DVB-T/H Retransmitter
SLx8000B14
## Option DVB-T/H Monitoring SLx8000B15
## 2100.3355.01
## verwendet in K20 K21 K30 K31
2100.1823.00
W1
Für diese Unterlage behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor.
Ausgedruckte Dokumente unterliegen nicht dem Änderungsdienst.
For this document all rights are reserved.
Printed documents are not subject to revision
2600 1
0999.9610.00
Benennung/Designation
ERSATZTEILLISTE SLX8000
SPARE PART LIST SLX8000
SLX8000
Datum/
Date
2010-04-13
Abt. /
Dept.
7TSK
2100.1823.00
Sprach./Lang
Ä.I. / C.I
de en
11.00
Blatt/Sheet
12 of 12
Dokument Nr. / Document No.
Name /
Name
CK
2100.1046.01 ST
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Author : HUPFAUER Create Date : 2007:12:17 09:10:06Z Modify Date : 2010:08:23 10:27:03+02:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows) Metadata Date : 2010:08:23 10:27:03+02:00 Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.2 Format : application/pdf Creator : HUPFAUER Title : 32 SLX8000-12.12.07-01.00.book Document ID : uuid:c8bb4c7d-24c1-427a-b444-79161a79f22c Instance ID : uuid:b29b5d33-50bc-48e9-8777-c5628f41e7d1 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 328EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools